Home

Sharp UP-820N User's Manual

1. oooooccnnnccnnnnnnnccononnnonononnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnennns 36 Scale ENOS iS E aueeeaieas 38 SINGIGsITeM FINGIZ ANON SIE scat eal ae Satie al 40 Age verification Birthday entry 22ssiasendiccendeOie a lieciaaeseacciecctelte Hen selieoede wimidatengrlaatem ele ohact 41 SpeciahEntnes fOr RED sis 42 Promotion mhean asmalen UNCION usina iia 42 PUA CS WMG CAINS nr ln alcoi 42 UI o A dheuaces 43 PLU UPC price inquiry View FUNCTION ooocccnccccconcccnncccnnnnnnnnnconnnnncnncnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnonnnrnranennnnanes 44 UPG Price cnange INCIO sisi eran totor sities dese dunetede sesso edaniseessleeecluencheteaseees 45 PLE VElS MIRE TOU GIRECE PLUS a 47 OMICS NC V Gl SIN area idgnd tutes sariactaisl e 48 Combo medienes igor dao aa aaa ainia baina 49 Condaimententes Or PEU ua eiii 49 Repeat round entes a da eee 50 Display OF Suba at ae oo detal 51 Merchandise SublOlal rai a 51 Taxable SUD e en rn ace do 51 Tax inclusive subtotal full subtotal a dies 51 FAY Subt alll iin cars senesciociateaseaenesath casts eante tener ngs curaetcoaisiouas Geitas et eaeeeibacuaseetaco maces ecaceunennctensenae 51 nn A nts teeta sa ences eee eae sauce nance oes E tad eaa need tere aeeaeee 51 FOOd stamp engle SUDO cia iii ic tia 51 Group alscountable SublO aca a 52 Gasoline discount SUDIOIAl 4222 2 aia 52 Holding Recalling OF TrANSACION sirier iE hiss E E E E E ER 53 Holdi Recall FUNC
2. Program each item as follows INITIAL D L DEPT 0000 DIRECT KEY 0000 PLU UPC 0000 DEPT Department preset PLU MENU KEY 0000 DIRECT KEY Direct department PLU preset LINK PLU 0000 PLU UPC PLU UPC preset CONDIMENT 0000 MIXEMATCH 0000 PLU MENU KEY PLU menu key preset COMBO MEAL 0000 LINK PLU Link PLU preset PERES EMBA LIST P DOWN Y aa CONDIMENT Condiment PLU preset 10 49AN The screen continues MIX amp MATCH COMBO MEAL UPC NON PLU TRANSACTION SERV SIGN OFF OPTION DATE TIME LOGO DEF MENU LEVEL TAX NEGATIVE POSITIVE MACRO KEY FUNC MENU KEY CAPTURE KEY CAPTURE JOB ONLINE PRESET INLINE PRESET KP PRESET DEVICE CONFIG ALL PGM Mix amp Match preset Combo meal preset UPC Non PLU code format Transaction preset Manager preset All server sign off Other preset Date time preset Logo text preset Default menu level Tax preset Negative number preset Positive number preset Macro key preset Function menu key preset Capture key preset Capture job preset Online preset Inline preset Kitchen printer preset Device configuration preset All PGM preset E Maintenance down loading without clearing of memory You can assign a secret code to each preset data to be downloaded Secret code max 4 digits 0001 to 9999 0000 Use the numeric entry method Nessa f 0 is entered the compulsory secret code entry will be canceled MAINTENANCE D L Program each item as f
3. The COPY symbol is printed on the copy receipt YOUR RECEIPT THANK YOU 06 21 2008 000001 41064 11 26AN JACKO002 COPY x PLO0002 PLO0003 MDSE ST TAX TOTAL 11 66 CASH 12 00 CHANGE 0 34 Validation Printing Function Your POS terminal can perform validation printing when it is connected a slip printer For the details of the slip printer consult your authorized SHARP dealer 7 Set a validation slip on the slip printer 2 Press the PRINT key Validation printing will start If the validation printing function is programmed as compulsory it can be overridden by the following operation If you need this overide function consult your authorized SHARP dealer 1 Enter the manager code and press 2 Enter your secret code and press 3 Press the wa key and then the mw key A 84 Manager s Override Entries and Correction after Finalization Manager s can override programmed limits such as maximum amounts for various functions and void incorrect entries that servers or cashiers cannot correct incorrect entries that are found after finalizing a transaction or cannot be corrected by direct or indirect void Override Entries Programmed limits for various functions can be overriden by a manager as follows Selling a 14 00 item Dept 03 for cash and subtracting the coupon amount 2 50 from the sales amount This example presumes that the POS terminal has been programmed
4. NO Does not display the customer s PBAL amount in case of customer entry e SERVICE DISPLAY Use the selective entry method YES Displays the customer s service amount in case of customer entry NO Does not display the customer s service amount in case of customer entry 222 Negative Code File Programming Use the following procedure for negative code file programming E Negative code Override status You can program the negative code and its override status 0001 11 23AM Procedure SETTING t Program each item as follows e NEGATIVE Use the numeric entry method Negative code max 16 digits 18 POSITIVE 19 MACRO KEY 20 FUNCTION KEY 21 CAPTURE KEY 22 CAPTURE JOBE e OVERRIDE Use the selective entry method 23 TAX 24 TRAINING Negative code checking can be overridden in compliance with PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y 9 9 p PGN2 MIKE programmed override status Override access operation v Not to override _ REG amp MGR Available to the manager and servers cashiers IC The message ACCESS is displayed MGR ONLY Only availanle to the manager The message CALL MGR is displayed INHIBIT The override operation is inhibited The message NOT ACCEPT is displayed PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE 0001 11 24AM v Select a negative code and press _ You can create a new code by entering the code then pressing the Or enter the cor
5. SICS entries e This function is useful when only one item for example a pack of cigarettes is sold by cash This function is applicable only to those departments programmed for SICS or to the PLUs subdepartments or UPC which are associated with the department e The transaction is finalized and the drawer opens as soon as you press the corresponding department key key key or the corresponding direct PLU key If entry of a department PLU subdepartment or UPC programmed for SICS follows entries of depart ments PLUs subdepartments or UPC not programmed for SICS the transaction is not finalized and is treated as a normal sale Key Operation Print rs 10 16 2008 000001 For finishing 9 1231 12 19PM JACK0002 the transaction DPT O9 2 50 NDSE ST 2 50 TAXI 0 15 CASH 2 6S SIF entries e If entry of a department PLU subdepartment or UPC programmed for SIF follows entries of departments PLUs subdepartments or UPC not programmed for SIF the transaction is finalized immediately as a single item cash sale e Like the SICS function this function is available for single item cash settlement Key Operation Print were 10 16 2008 000001 10N 1233 12 21PM JACK0002 For finishing the transaction DPT O8 17 45 DPT O9 15 00 MDSE ST 32 45 TAX 1 95 CASH 34 40 40 E Age verification Birthday entry The age verification function is used for prohibiting sales of goods de
6. 0 sales in the SCM report e DAILY NET Use the selective entry method NOT SKIP Does not skip those data that are 0 sales in the daily net report SKIP Skips those data that are 0 sales in the daily net report You can program the memory type and the starting time for the hourly report Procedure HOURLY REPORT MEMORY TYPE n STARTING TIME 00 PGH2 3 02AM Program each item as follows e MEMORY TYPE Use the selective entry method 15MIN Selects the 15 minute type 30MIN Selects the 30 minute type 60MIN Selects the 60 minute type e STARTING TIME Use the numeric entry method Starting time entry max 2 digits 0 to 23 207 E Stacked report Your POS terminal is equipped with the stacked report printing function that enables multiple X Z reports to be printed in sequence by a single request Procedure Select a stacked report no from the stacked reports list 0001 10 57AM 0001 10 57AM The screen continues STACKED REPORT 1 a PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE 01 01 DEPARTMENT 02 DEPT IND GROUP 03 DEPT GROUP TOTAL 04 MARKDOWN DEPT 05 PLU UPC 06 PLU BY DEPT 07 PLU IND GROUP 08 PLU GROUP TOTAL NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE You can select a maximum of twenty reports from the stacked reports list Some reports can be set their parameters such as START CODE and END CODE e 01 DEPA
7. 3 Confirm that the print head release lever is in its printing position 4 Set the paper correctly in the journal paper holder of the printer See the illustrations on the previous page 5 Insert the end of the paper into the paper chute as shown on the right It will automatically be fed through the printer 6 Insert the end of the paper into the slit in the paper take up spool Press the key to feed paper more if required 7 Wind the paper around the spool shaft two or three turns 8 Set the spool on the bearing 9 Replace the printer cover E Manual installing of a paper roll When you want to manually install a new roll of paper while your machine is turned off follow the steps below 7 Pull the print head release lever toward you to lift up the prin head Correctly place the new paper roll in the receipt journal paper roll holder Insert the paper end into the paper chute until it comes out of the printer Cut off the excess receipt paper or wind the paper around the take up spool as described on the right journal paper 5 Return the print head release lever to its original position BW Q N 266 E Removing the journal paper roll 7 Remove the printer cover 2 Press the key to feed the journal paper until all its printed part comes out 3 Cut the paper and remove the take up spool 4 Cut the paper behind the printer and near the paper roll 5 Press the key until the pape
8. 4 When you select 8 NON ACCESSED UPC select whether to delete all the non accessed UPCs at a time 1 ALL DELETE or delete the non accessed UPCs individually 2 IND DELETE Moi 39 t is recommended that you first take a report before deleting operation Dynamic UPC clear Enter the X1 Z1 mode from the mode selection window Select 2 RESETTING 3 Select 9 D UPC CLEAR to clear a designated range of UPCs 10 D UPC CLEAR PICK to pick up codes one by one to clear them see the NOTE on page 89 or 11 D UPC CLEAR DEPT to clear codes on an associated department basis N Non accessed customer deletion 1 Enter the X2 Z2 mode from the mode selection window 2 Select 5 NON ACCESS CUST 3 Select 1 READING to take a report or 2 DELETE to delete non accessed customer codes 4 When you select 2 DELETE select whether to delete all the non accessed customer codes at a time 1 ALL DELETE or delete non accessed customers codes individually 2 IND DELETE Nor t is recommended that you first take a report before deleting operation Customer code deletion 1 Enter X2 Z2 mode from the mode selection window 2 Select 6 CUSTOMER DELETE 3 Specify the range start end customer codes you want to delete io E Non accessed UPC report 0105 X 1 7 NON ACCESSED UPC UPC 3112345678905 UPC code AAAODO Item labe 1TEM J 6 0 woot ITEM U 6
9. ENTER gt Less than the programmed upper limit max 7 digits amount 30 PLU entries direct PLU entries Procedure When using a programmed price Unit price gt Direct PLU key for subdept Key Operation Display 2a al 1 PL00002 2 00 16 PLU UPC 1600 ENTER 1 PL00016 16 00 a 1 PL00008 8 00 MDSE ST 26 00 TAX1 1 56 CIAT CASH 27 56 TAX 1 56 SBTL 27 56 JACK HOME MENU 0002 P1L1 10 43AN PLU menu based entries PLU entries and subdepartment entries Follow this procedure Procedure For PLU entry thru gt Item selection gt ENTER Unit price ENTER from the window for subdept entries The pop up window for amount entry will open UPC entries Procedure 8 UPC code o UPC code gt ME euro Registration max 13 digits When the dept key is depressed directly ee e Unit price max 6 digits __ Dept code AUTO DELETE NO DELETE o a E aa Key Operation Display 5099887654302 1 ITEM A 2 50 MDSE ST 2 50 TAX1 0 15 CASH 2 65 TAX 0 15 SBTL 2 65 JACK HOME MENU 0002 P1L1 11 20PH 3 E Repeat entries You can use this function for repetitive entries of the same item Simply press the repeat function key after a valid item entry gt gt REPEAT Key Operation Print De ool 11 01 2008 000001 sos 8 1337 11 29PM JACKO002 y direct B Repeated 5 lego ener 3 2 00 depa
10. PLU00040 ITEM A 2 00 PLU00041 ITEM B 3 10 and PLU00042 ITEM C 2 50 Mix and match table no 2 Text VALUE SET Base quantity 3 Price 6 90 Key Operation Print Treated as 2 30 item gt ITEN 40 I Treated as 3 10 item a La VALUE SET 10 Promotion Treated as 2 50 item J o oar CASH E PLU UPC link entries It is possible to link PLUs UPCs linked PLUs UPCs with a leading link PLU UPC so that they can be combined for a single key entry of the leading PLU UPC You can program a maximum of 99 leading link PLUs UPCs A maxi mum of five PLUs UPCs can be linked to a leading PLU UPC In case that you register a PLU UPC to which any PLUs UPCs are linked the linked PLUs UPCs are automatically registered together with the leading link PLU UPC Only the leading PLU is affected by the status shift keys Ea sae sas ea and keys The percent calculation is in effect for the amount of the leading PLU In case of link PLU Key Operation Print PL00021 PL00025 Linked PLUs PL00026 PL00027 CASH 42 E UPC learning function When you enter or scan an undefined UPC code you are required to enter its unit price and associated depart ment The entered UPC code associated department and unit price are stored in the UPC file or the dynamic UPC file and used for future UPC sales entries e When there is no remaining space in the file the data is not stored in the file e
11. System Z1 reports on page 203 System PGM2 mode operations on page 203 Initial down loading on page 204 Maintenance down loading on page 204 Auto key on page 204 201 E Z1 reports You can assign a secret code to each report Secret code max 4 digits 0001 to 9999 0000 Use the numeric entry method NOTE If 0 is entered the compulsory secret code entry will be canceled Z1 DEPARTMENT 0000 PLU 0000 PLU BY DEPT 0000 DYNAMIC UPC 0000 D UPC BY DEPT 0000 TRANSACTION 0000 POSITIVES 0000 ALL SERVER 0000 PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGN2 MIKE 0001 10 41AM Program each item as follows The screen continues IND SERVER Individual server report HOURLY Hourly report GLU report E PGM2 mode operations You can assign a secret code to each programming operation in the PGM2 mode Secret code max 4 digits 0001 to 9999 0000 Use the numeric entry method Noyz f O is entered the compulsory secret code entry will be canceled Program each item as follows PGH2 ARTICLE DIRECT KEY ARTICLE Article programming PLU MENU KEY DIRECT KEY Direct key programming AE PLU MENU KEY PLU menu key programming TEXT FUNCTION Function programming Sey MEDIA Media programming TERMINAL PREV TEXT Text programming PGM2 MIKE PERSONNEL Personnel programming TERMINAL Terminal programming The screen continues DATE TIME Date time programming TRAINI
12. e en E UPC Non PLU code format EAN 13 type BESS E E Flag Free format _ Ss 02 or 20 29 Procedure Select an arbitrary number or the desired UPC TYPE OF CODE SYSTEM CODE you set 03 TYPE OF CODE SYSTEM CODE LENGTH FIELD 1 LENGTH FIELD 2 FIELD 2 DATA PRICE C D TAB PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y _ PGH2 MIKE EAN 8 type elii n n i i Free format Flag Price check digit H Field 1 _t Field 2 l Free format area Program each item as follows e TYPE OF CODE Use the selective entry method EAN 8 EAN 8 format code consists of 8 digits EAN 13 UPC A EAN 13 format code consists of 13 digits e SYSTEM CODE Use the numeric entry method System code i e flag code EAN 8 1 digit EAN 13 2 digits ISBN ISSN and press codes are always used the fixed format even if code 37 43 78 98 or 97 is entered e LENGTH FIELD 1 Use the numeric entry method Length of field 1 number of digits O to 9 e LENGTH FIELD 2 Use the numeric entry method Length of field 2 number of digits O to 9 e FIELD 2 DATA Use the selective entry method Meaning of field 2 QUANTITY Quantity PRICE Price e PRICE C D Use the selective entry method Price check digit YES Use the price check digit NO Not use the price check digit e TAB Use the selective entry method TAB or decimal point of field 3 2 1 0 138 E UPC del
13. CONSECUTI VEH Program the item as follows e CONSECUTIVE Use the numeric entry method Enter a number max 4 digits O to 9999 that is one less than the desired starting number PREV PGM2 MIKE E Interval timer You can program the timer for THE TILL TIMER the screen save mode timer and the drawer alarm timer Procedure INTERVAL TIMER Program each item as follows TILL TIMER RAR Aer ah TILL TIMER Use the numeric entry method The POS terminal counts the number of times the drawer is left open for longer than a programmed time limit The counter will be incremented by one each time a programmed time limit is reached RES REKKI LIST P DOWN Y The time limit for TILL TIMER can be preset to 0 255 seconds The count is printed on the transaction report and server report If the number 0 is entered this function is unavailable e SCREEN SAVE Use the numeric entry method Screen save mode timer max 2 digits 0 to 99 minutes If the number 0 is entered the POS terminal will turn off the display after the POS terminal remains idle e DRAWER ALARM Use the numeric entry method Length of alarm time with drawer opening 0 to 255 seconds e Your POS terminal monitors how long the drawer is kept open from the moment the drawer is opened at the end of a transaction in the REG VOID mode It stops time counting when a valid key except the TAX BILL and RCPT keys is pressed for the n
14. POS TERMINAL MODEL UP 820N INSTRUCTION MANUAL OS RS 9 S S SS CAUTION The AC power socket outlet should be installed near the equipment and should be easily accessible INTRODUCTION Thank you very much for your purchase of the SHARP POS Terminal Model UP 820N Please read this Manual carefully before operating your POS terminal in order to gain full understanding of functions and features Please keep this manual for future reference It will help you if you encounter any operational problems IMPORTANT Avoid installing this terminal in a location that may be subjected to direct radiation unusual temperature changes and high humidity or exposure to water or other liquids Installation in such a location could cause damage to the cabinet and the electronic components Do not operate this terminal with wet hands This may cause damage to the terminal Do not apply excessive pressure to the display Do not use a sharp pointed object on the display This may cause damage to the LCD When cleaning this terminal use a dry soft cloth Never use solvents such as benzene or thinner The use of such chemicals will lead to discoloration or deterioration of the cabinet The terminal plugs into any standard wall outlet 120V 10 AC with a dedicated earth ground Other electrical devices on the same electrical circuit could cause the terminal to malfunction If the terminal malfunctions call your loca
15. Select a report title listed in the table shown later If needed enter the corresponding values in the Data to be entered column in the table shown later After all steps to take a report are completed the message ARE YOU SURE will appear Select one of the following options e YES to reset the sales information e NO to cancel the report procedure oR QND WE Flash report You can take flash reports display only in the X1 mode for department sales cash in drawer CID and sales total for a fast view of sales revenue 1 Enter the X1 Z1 mode from the mode selection window 2 Select 3 FLASH MODE to display the flash report menu 3 Select DEPT SALES to take a flash report of department sales CID to take a flash report of cash in drawer or SALES TOTAL to take a flash report of sales total o Available report type in each mode Data to be entered OPXZ X1 Z1 X2 Z2 X1 Z1 X2 Z2 Start end department codes Department group no Start end PLU UPC codes Z X1 Z1 X2 Z2 Department code lt DEPARTMENT gt DEPARTMENT Department by group DEPT IND Individual group total of GROUP departments DEPT GROUP Full group total of TOTAL departments MARKDOWN DEPT Department markdown PLU UPC PLU UPC by designated range PLU PICK UP PLU UPC pick up report PLU BY DEPT PLU UPC by associated dept PLU IND Individual group of PLU
16. appears when the used memory is 80 Stock alarm indicator appears when the used memory is 90 fj appears when the used memory is 95 Appears when the stock of the PLU which you entered is zero negative or the minimum Electronic journal near full indicator f appears when the used memory is 80 Tax shift status indicator appears when the used memory is 90 fj appears when the used memory is 95 V Appears when the Tax status is shifted Receipt ON OFF state indicator R Appears when the receipt ON OFF function is in the OFF state Sentinel mark X Numeric key data area Appears when the cash in drawer exceeds the programmed sentinel amount The sentinel server is performed for the total cash in drawer Shows numeric data by numeric key entry e Screen example 2 PGM mode Information area 2 Scroll guidance Page up key Cursor up key Main display area 00001 PRICE 1 NAME1 PL00001 KP TEXTI PL00001 TOUCH KEY TEXT 00001 menes DEPT CODE 01 MI a SIGN ENTRY TYPE PRESET BASE QTY E H Pi PGH2 MIKE E LU Information area 1 Numeric key data area Time area C ommon status area Previous record key Next record key Item list key Page down key Cursor down key Main display area Shows programmable items 18 Information area 1 Shows the mode you are in server name electronic mail indicator M and server code Refer to the REG mode screen exa
17. check function Any code non add code existing in the positive file is treated as valid NO Disables the positive check function e VP Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Compulsory validation printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory validation printing Sia E Cash benefit by EBT continued e DRAWER OPENING Use the selective entry method NO Does not open the drawer YES Opens the drawer e OUTPUT KP No 1 thru 3 Use the numeric entry method ID number of the remote printer 1 2 or 3 1 digit 1 to 9 If the number 0 is entered no data will be sent to the remote printer e CHIT RECEIPT Use the selective entry method YES Prints on the chit receipt in the remote printer format NO Prints nothing on the chit receipt e DATA ENT JOB Use the numeric entry method Key data entry job no Capture job no O thru 99 When 0 is programmed data capture entry is inhibited e CARD PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the card number NO Does not print the card number e CARD HOLDER PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the name of the card holder NO Does not print the name of the card holder e EXPIRATION PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the card expiration date NO Does not print the card expiration date You can also select a food stamp tender key by pressing the corresponding key when it has been placed directly on the keyboard ins
18. or Ne or Mg O n ES g gt E HOME MENU 30 00 P1L1 2 21PM 1 DPT O1 1 DPT O1 TAX2 ST 1 DPT O1 TAX2 ST CASH FUNCTION MENU11 0002 P111 2 23PM If any of the media keys i e cash check 1 thru check 9 or charge 1 thru charge 9 is programmed for tax deletion in the PGM2 mode the tax can be deleted without using the procedures above In this case pressing the corresponding media key programmed for tax deletion will always cause the selected tax to be deleted 57 E Tax status shift Your POS terminal allows you to shift the EJEA ES rammed tax status of a department or PLU key or discount or TAX3 a percent key by pressing the 334 ESE Aea E and or keys before that key After the entry is completed the programmed tax status of the key is resumed Key Operation Display 3000 or MER CAJAT TAX 0 00 SBTL 0 007 JACK 3000 TAX 0 00 SBTL 0 007 TAX1SF 3000 The entry of a multi taxable tem for PST y and or GST is prohibited as follows for Canada 1 DPT O1 30 00 In case of Tax 1 PST Tax 2 PST Tax 3 PST Tax 4 GST Tax 5 PST Taxable 1 and 2 1teM prohibited Taxable 1 and 3 item pe eee een ee eee oe prohibited TAX 3 00 SBTL 33 00 Taxable 1 and 4 1teM allowed DPT O1 Taxable 1 and 5iteM prohibited 530 00 Taxable 2 and 3 lteM prohibited l Taxable 2 and 4 1teM
19. 015 ee OTAL SCM 547 90 SCH 10 00 SCM TTL 537 90 105 E Hourly report e Sample X report e Sample Z report 12 06 2008 000001 12 06 2008 000001 41576 8 15PH HIKEOOO1 1376 8 15PM MIKEOOO1 0160 X 1 R0160 Z1 HOURLY Transaction HOURLY counter 10 00PH Sales total HOURLY 21 COVER CT Q Cover counter AVE l Average sales l 10 30PM amount per COVER CT o eel The subsequent printout occurs cover counter in the same format as in the SUBTOTAL Subtotal sample X report COVER CT 10 00 10 59 7 00PM COVER CT AVE 7 30PM COVER CT NOTE The hourly report can be formatted by 15 min 30 min or 1 hour intervals depending upon programming 106 E GLU PBLU report e Sample X report e Sample Z report 12 06 2008 _ 000001 1801 10 34PM JACKO002 12 06 2008 _ 000001 1790 11 21PM JACKO002 0180 K1 GLU 0180 Z1 GLU Range r Table PBLU code GLU Z1 T Server code COVER CT Cover counter xPBAL Balance amount eh COVER CI The subsequent printout occurs in the same format as in the aP BAL sample X report 8T COVER CT T This table PBLU code was used in the training mode xPBAL FREE GLU 1H Free table PBLU code COVER CT This number or code has been transferred out PBAL OTAL COVER CT 90 Total PBAL 196 75 E GLU PBLU report by server e Sample X report e Sample Z report 12 06 2008
20. 1 When you select DELETE Z1 is printed instead of X1 2 When there is any sales data of the UPC for PLU UPC report the data is printed here When you delete the UPC in Z1 mode under this situation the UPC data for PLU UPC report is also deleted E Non accessed customer report H0207 xQ NON ACCESSED CUST 0000000000020 Customer code NAME 20 Name ADDRESS 20 A Address 2 CHARGE 0000000000075 NAME 75 ADDRESS 75 136 39 30 CHARGE 62 02 0000000065321 NAME 65321 ADDRESS 65321 97 52 CHARGE 0 00 SUBTOTAL 261 28 CHARGE 89 38 TOTAL 261 28 CHARGE 89 38 When you select DELETE Z2 is printed instead of X2 10 E Customer delete report H0298 Z2 CUSTOMER DELETE 40000000000001 49999999999999 Customer range 0000000000102 Customer code NAME 1 02 Name ADDRESS 102 Address CHARGE 0000000000123 NAME 123 ADDRESS 123 CHARGE 0000000005678 NAME 5678 ADDRESS 5678 CHARGE SUBTOTAL CHARGE TOTAL CHARGE E Dynamic UPC clear by designated range by pickup list 0168 Z1 D UPC CLEAR 1000000000000 9999999999999 11234567890054 11M 2 1 sQ 15 85 NET SLS 5Q 15 85 100 00 TM 2 6 80 22 40 NET SLS 80 22 40 100 00 TOTAL 30 15 85 WASTE TL 00 0 00 0 00 0168 Z1 D UPC CLEAR by associated dept 0167 1 Z1 D UPC CLR DEPT DP1 O 1 0 00 00 0 00 90 15 85 100 00 1 If y
21. 100 CENTS 1 2 5 252 Function text gross Function text refund Rate Tax status Function programming Key data entry job no Sentinel HALO e Server PGM1 or PGM2 mode e Customer PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 000001 1938 2 34PH 12 06 2008 000001 1447 1 58PH MIKE0001 PGM2 x SERVER Report type CUSTOMER Server code SRVROOO 1 MIKE Server name 0000000000001 RANGE 1 9999 Linked GLU HR JAMES OOO Se oe RANGE 1 9999 Eio 0000000000002 ROOO RANGE 1 5990 Net sales 123 4567 0890 SRYVFOO 1 4 SERV 014 Customer control PGM2 mode RANGE 1 9999 0 00 0001 0000 SAYROO 15 SERY 015 RANGE 1 9999 0 00 00D1 0000 12 06 2008 000001 1539 2 34PH PGM2 CUSTOMER PROGRAM PBAL DISPLAY SERVICE DISPLAY e Negative no PGM2 mode e Positive no PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 000001 1541 2 34PM 12 06 2008 000001 1540 2 34PM PGM2 POSITIVER 0000000000000001 0000000000003030 0000000000006561 2 PGM NEGATIVES 0000000000000001 0000000000000123 0000000000000345 e Manager PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 000001 1448 1 58PM MIKEOOO1 M2 PG MANAGER HGRRO 1 253 e Optional features PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 000001 1449 1 58PH HIKEOGO1 PGM2 OPTIONAL OPTIONAL FUNC PROHIBIT OPX Z REPORT ENABLE PAID OUT PUBLIC RFND SALES PUBLIC REFUND RETURN PUBLIC Ist LAST VOID ENABLE DIRECT VOID PUBLIC INDIRECT VOI
22. 4 or 6 to level 5 When you press this key the price level shift indicator will show P5 Ea Shifts the PLU price level from level 1 2 3 4 or 5 to level 6 When you press this key the price level shift indicator will show P6 The automatic return mode shifts the PLU price level back to level 1 after a PLU entry automatically You can select whether the PLU price level should return to level 1 each time you enter one item or each time you finalize one transaction The lock shift mode holds the current PLU price level shift until a price level shift key is pressed Automatic return mode for price shifts If your terminal has been programmed for PLU UPC price level shift in the automatic return mode press a desired price level shift key before a numeric entry Procedure each item AH Level no 1 to 6 each transaction Direct PLU thru Level no 1 to 6 2 When you use the FF method PLU you need not press the key for a multiplication entry Numeric entry PLU code Ml Return to Q ty Con etc price level 1 Y PLU code Payment Numeric entry Q ty Poel etc 48 Lock shift mode for price shifts If your terminal has been programmed for PLU UPC price level shift in the lock shift mode press the desired price level shift key before a numeric entry Procedure To shift the price level of another PLU Numeric
23. Compulsory validation printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory validation printing e GAS DISCOUNT Use the selective entry method YES Enables gas discount NO Disables gas discount e TAX1 thru 5 DELETE Use the selective entry method You can program each check key to delete tax i e tax 1 tax 2 tax 3 tax 4 and tax 5 when it is pressed YES Deletes Tax n 1 thru 5 NO Calculates Tax n 1 thru 5 e DRAWER OPENING Use the selective entry method NO Does not open the drawer YES Opens the drawer e AMOUNT Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Compulsory amount tendered entry INHIBIT Inhibit amount tendered entry e OUTPUT KP No 1 thru 3 Use the numeric entry method ID number of the remote printer 1 2 or 3 1 digit 1 to 9 If the number 0 is entered no items will be sent to the remote printer e CHIT RECEIPT Use the selective entry method YES Prints on the chit receipt in the remote printer format NO Prints nothing on the chit receipt e DATA ENT JOB Use the numeric entry method Key data entry job no Capture job no O thru 99 When 0 is programmed the data capture entry is inhibited e EFT ACCT PROG Use the selective entry method You can select EFT ACCT compulsory or not compulsory NOT COMPULSORY Not compulsory EFT ACCT EFT COMPULSORY Compulsory EFT ACCT COMPULSORY Compulsory ACCT 164 E Charge keys continued e EFT Use the selective entry method S
24. Currency conversion keys on page 173 7 EAT IN See Eat in keys on page 173 8 SERVICE See Service key on page 174 9 FINAL gt See Final key on page 176 10 CID gt See Cash in drawer on page 178 11 CH CG gt See Check change on page 178 12 CA CK gt See Check cashing on page 179 13 MONEY gt See Currency denominations on page 181 155 E Cash keys Procedure Select the desired cash key from the cash keys list GLU PBLU ENABLE SHORT TENDER ENABLE HEADER ON BILL NO FOOTER ON BILL NO CLOSED GC NO RETAINED _ BILL PRINT NON COMPULSORY PREV PGH2 MIKE The screen continues Program each item as follows e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for the cash key Up to 12 characters can be entered e HALO High Amount Lockout use the numeric entry method AB is the same as A x 10 A Significant digit 1 thru 9 B Number of zeros to follow the significant digit O thru 8 You can set AB at 18 for no limitation e GLU PBLU Use the selective entry method GLU PBLU entry COMPULSORY Makes the GLU PBLU entry compulsory INHIBIT Inhibits GLU PBLU entry ENABLE Enables GLU PBLU entry e SHORT TENDER Use the selective entry method Short amount tender DISABLE Disables short amount tender ENABLE Enables short amount tender e HEADER ON BILL Use the selective entry method YES Enables header printing on the bill NO
25. DAILY NET HOURLY REPORT MEMORY TYPE 30 STARTING TIME on REPORT Oo 2 254 e Function text PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 000001 1450 2 00PM MIKEOOO1 2 PG FUNCTION TEXT Report type Function text default Text preset DRW CNT To be continued DRY CNT DEPT TL DEPT SUBTOTAL HOSE ST TOTAL DEPT TL DEPT SUBTOTAL HDSE ST TOTAL CHANGE GDISCATL CASH TL CB CA2 To be continued 255 CB CHK8 CB CHK9 CASH BACK CB TL CG CB SCM SCH SCM TIL CASH IS CHECK1 IS CHECK2 IS CHECK3 IS CHECK4 IS CHECKS IS CHECK6 IS CHECK IS CHECKB IS CHECKS IS COMBOI COHBO98 COMBO99 CB CHK8 CB CHK9 CashBack CB TL CG CB SCH SCH SCH TTL CASH IS CHECK1 IS CHECK2 IS CHECK3 IS CHECK4 IS CHECKS IS CHECK6 IS CHECK IS CHECKS JS CHECKS IS COMBO CONBOS8 CONBOS9 e Department group text PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 000001 1451 2 01PM HIKEOOO1 PGM2 DEPT GROUP Report type Function text default Text preset e PLU group text PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 000001 1452 2 01PH MTKEOOO1 PGM2 PLU GROUP Report type Function text PLU GRO PLU GRO1 SETAU e Server group text PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 000001 1453 2 01PM IKE0001 PGM2 SERVER GROUP Report type Function text GROUPI GROUP default GROUP2 GROUP3 GROUP4 GROUPS GROUPE GROUP GROUP8 GROUP9 GR
26. E PLU UPC continued e ENTRY TYPE Use the selective entry method Mode parameter PRESET Preset price only 00001 T nea m OPEN amp PRESET Open price and preset price aie No INHIBIT Inhibited TAXABLE 1 OPEN Open price only TAXABLE 2 TAXABLE 3 ae For UPC it is fixed to PRESET FS CASH BNF RENE RENTS BASE QTY Use the numeric entry method Base quantity for each PLU UPC which is counted each time the item is entered max 2 digits e MINIMUM STOCK Use the numeric entry method Minimum stock quantity for a PLU max 7 digits GROUP DISCOUNT1 GROUP DISCOUNT2 GROUP DISCOUNT3 e PRICE SHIFT Use the selective entry method aot ENABLE Enables PLU UPC price level shift GROUP2 INHIBIT Inhibits PLU UPC price level shift PRIORITY GROUP o COMPULSORY Makes PLU UPC price level shift compulsory PGM2 MIKE When COMPULSORY is selected for a PLU UPC repeat entries of the PLU UPC are inhibited e ZERO OF P1 thru 6 Use the selective entry method 00001 ALLOWED Allows a zero price entry MODIFY OUTPUT INHIBIT Inhibits a zero price entry DUTPUT KP No 1 OUTPUT KP No 2 OUTPUT KP No 3 e COUPON OBJECT Use the numeric entry method Wak Gia Select an object PLU code max 5 digits E car A coupon like PLU is able to link to another PLU object PLU By this programming the associated coupon PLU cannot be entered unless the object PLU has been rung up However the quantity is not affected 00001 e Any o
27. GT2 GT3 02 10 l GT2 00000155077 14 Grand total of ST TL 10 2 counter and total GT3 00000000634 13 a GDISCAI 2Q E TR 00000000000 00 5 minus registration Grand total id e GDISCZTL Dala The subsequent printout occurs in th f in th NET 1 5537 86 Net sales total in the re eae the TAXI ST 2864 08 Net taxable 1 total 1 GRS TAX 176 26 Gross tax 1 total When the Canadian tax system RFD TAXI 4 38 ae tax is selected TAX TX1 EXPT 171 88 L Net tax 1 total TAK2 ST 00 Taxable 1 exempt TAX1 SI 2771 58 GRS TAK2 GRS TAXI 1X2 EXPT Tax 1 Gross manual tax total manual tax Net total Tax 4 239 89 Tax total 5517 78 Sales total without 5151 57 e total COMBO 1 s 20 Combo1 countor and total To be continued on the next page GST TIL Manual tax Exempt total from GST PST total GST total 90 3 counter and total Item Total for item 1 counter and total Item Total for item Vender coupon UPC counter and total Y CP UPC EAT IN 1 Eat in 1 counter and total DIRECT VOID 100 PAST VOID 60 i SBIL VOID 30 72 08 HGR VD 10 10 00 VOID 10 10 00 REFUND 80 82 50 40 Direct void counter and total Indirect void counter and total Subtotal void counter and total Manager item void counter and total Void mode transaction counter and total Refund counter and total Return counter and total Hash item
28. NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PREV PGH2 MIKE 219 GLU Code Programming Use the following procedure for GLU code programming Procedure SETTING HN PUP 4 09 DATE TIME 10 OPTIONAL 11 SECRET CODE 12 REPORT 13 LOGO TEXT 14 DEVICE CONFIG 15 GLU CODE 16 CUSTOMER PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE GLU CODE PREV LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE GLU START CODE END CODE PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE in the SETTING window select 15 GLU CODE e The GLU CODE window will appear 2 Select any item from the following option list 1 GLU GLU PBLU code You can program the range of available guest check codes Program each item as follows e START CODE Use the numeric entry method Start GLU code max 4 digits 1 to 9999 e END CODE Use the numeric entry method End GLU code max 4 digits 1 to 9999 220 Customer Programming Use the following procedure for customer programming Procedure SETTING H 09 DATE TIME 10 OPTIONAL 11 SECRET CODE 12 REPORT 13 LOGO TEXT 14 DEVICE CONFIG 15 GLU CODE 16 CUSTOMER PGH2 MIKE 0001 11 20AM CUSTOMER PGH2 MIKE 7 in the SETTING window select 16 CUSTOMER 2 Select an option form the following option list 1 CUSTOMER Customer code 2 CUSTOMER PROGRAM Customer programming The following illustration shows those options included in the customer programming
29. Remote printer 5 Remote printer 6 Remote printer 7 Remote printer 8 Remote printer 9 17 BCR SCANNER 18 POLE DISPLAY BCR Scanner Pole display The following illustration shows those options included in the device configuration programming group 14 DEVICE CONFIG 01 BUILT IN PRINTER 02 JOURNAL PRINTER 03 EXTERNAL PRINTER 04 RECEIPT PRINTER 05 BILL PRINTER 06 REPORT PRINTER 07 VALIDATION VP 08 KP 1 09 KP 2 10 KP 3 11 KP 4 12 KP 5 13 KP 6 14 KP 7 15 KP 8 16 KP 9 17 BCR SCANNER 18 POLE DISPLAY See See See See See See See See m See Built in printer on page 215 See Journal printer on page 215 External journal on page 215 Receipt printer on page 216 Bill printer on page 216 Report printer on page 217 Validation VP printer on page 217 Remote printer on page 220 BCR Scanner on page 220 Pole display on page 221 e E Built in printer Procedure BUILT IN PRINTER LIGHT amp SHADE IMAGE FOOTER Program each item as follows NOT PRINT e LIGHT amp SHADE Use the numeric entry method Select a light and shade level 00 to 99 00 65 of the standard 50 100 lt standard gt NEXT LIST P DOWN Y 99 135 of the standard PREV PGM2 MIKE e IMAGE FOOTER Use the selective entry method PRINT Prints footer graphic logo NOT PRINT Does
30. Up to 12 characters can be entered KKRA2 HALO TEXT KARAZ DATA ENT JOBS 00 EFT ACCT PROG NOT COMPULSORY 4 Noi ACCT ONLINE COMPULSORY J NOTE You can also select an RA key by pressing the corresponding key when it has been placed directly on the keyboard instead of selecting the key from the menu ACCT NEGATIVES NO ACCT POSITIVES NO e DATA ENT JOB Use the numeric entry method Key data entry job no Capture job no 0 thru 99 When 0 is programmed data entry is inhibited e EFT ACCT PROG Use the selective entry method EFT ACCT programming e NOT COMPULSORY e ACCT COMPULSORY e ACCT Use the selective entry method e ONLINE COMPULSORY e OFFLINE COMPULSORY e CARD RD COMPULSORY e ACCT NEGATIVE Use the selective entry method e NO e YES e ACCT POSITIVE Use the selective entry method e NO e YES 150 E PO Procedure Select the desired paid out key from the PO keys list PREV PGH2 MIKE E Manual tax Procedure DATA ENT JOB PREV PGH2 MIKE Program each item as follows e HALO High Amount Lockout use the numeric entry method A Significant digit for HALO 1 thru 9 B Number of zeros to follow the significant digit for HALO 0 thru 8 AB is the same as Ax 10B e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for the paid out key Up to 12 characters can be entered You can also select a PO key by pressing the correspon
31. and enter a value to be added or subtracted e The entry of a new stock value will update to the PLU UPC stock counter 131 E Link PLU table for PLU UPC It is possible to link PLUs linked PLUs with a PLU or UPC link PLU UPC so that with a single key depression of the link PLU UPC key However the maximum number of links is five Even if more than five PLUs are linked the sixth or higher link is invalid not actualized Procedure Program each item as follows e LINK PLU TABLE Use the numeric entry method Link PLU table number 1 thru 99 e LINKED PLU 1 thru 5 5 PLUs max Select linked PLUs max 5 PLUs from the list e PLU codes should be defined before programming a link PLU table e If the key is pressed on the table number selection menu the selected table will be deleted PREV PGH2 MIKE Selected link PLU table no 01 LINKED PLU 1 LINKED PLU 2 LINKED PLU 3 LINKED PLU 4 LINKED PLUS PREV PGH2 MIKE 132 E Condiment table The condiment entry is intended to assist the operator in making menu entries which require special cooking instructions For example a server can make such entries as a garnish of potato with salad and steak doneness When a server enters a menu item PLU to which PLUs for the condiment entry have been assigned these orders such as a garnish of potato will be printed on the receipt and conveyed to the kitchen Before programming for the cond
32. continued e EFT ACCT PROG Use the selective entry method You can select EFT ACCT compulsory or not compulsory NOT COMPULSORY Not compulsory EFT ACCT EFT COMPULSORY Compulsory EFT ACCT COMPULSORY Compulsory ACCT e EFT Use the selective entry method Select ACTION CODE from the following options AUTH ONLY DIAL POST AUTH e EFT TYPE Use the selective entry method Select the transaction type GIFT CARD CHECK DEBIT CREDIT e ACCT Use the selective entry method ONLINE COMPULSORY OFFLINE COMPULSORY CARD RD COMPULSORY e ACCT NEGATIVE Use the selective entry method NO YES e ACCT POSITIVE Use the selective entry method NO YES e CARD PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the card number NO Does not print the card number e SIGN LINE PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the signature line NO Does not print the signature line e CARD HOLDER PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the name of the card holder NO Does not print the name of the card holder e EXPIRATION PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the card expiration date NO Does not print the card expiration date 158 E Cash keys continued e NUMBER OF RCPT Use the numeric entry method Number of authorization receipts to be issued 1 digit 1 to 9 If the number 0 is entered no authorization receipt is issued You can also select a cash key by pres
33. 00 50 00 FUNCTION MENUIS 0002 P1L1 5 17PM 61 E Transferring guest checks out or in Transfer out in Transferring guest checks out At the end of server shift or whenever a server is relieved the server s responsibility for one or more open guest checks can be released to transfer it to another server Procedure server sign on gt XXXX t cuupatucode For the next guest check Key Operation Print TRANS T 11 09 2008 001 101 ow 1330 5 35PM JACKO002 et TRAN OUT TBL 101 EXPBAL 13 00 Transferring guest checks in When the second server is assigned to be responsible for guest checks that have been transferred out Procedure new server Cover count entr oj 8 sign on RR au Fe GLU PBLU code 2 digits anit For the next guest check Key Operation Print Only when cover count entry is non compulsory MN 11 09 2008 000001 101 aw 1333 5 38PM MIKEOOO TRAN IN TBLH H101 HEPBAL 13 00 2 E Bill totalizing bill transfer Bill totalizing The bill totalizing function is used to combine multiple bills The function is useful for example when a particular guest pays not only his or her bill but also the bills of other guests Adding guest checks Procedure 8 1 gt GLU PBLU code c u GLU PBLU code sen A _ _ a a eee ps aid 1 bill 2 bill SRVC FINAL Payment operations S
34. 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 032 047 al ye Go m O al A 048 063 8 N O 064 079 C2 QSL jo NJ _ o o o ps O 00 oo O 00 al O 00 O O 00 N O O N O O A 080 095 O O O eee Sion gt 00 NO O O J S al O O O 00 O gt Oo 00 mb Oo oo O O O O 00 O amp O O 3 g Py g 00 Ke o mb O O mb O mb mb O N O O O O 00 N al gt 00 ine O O O O O 00 N al al o Oo N O O oO G X Ql i S N do 096 111 o o o J O O oo J o o o om hy O O oo o o o o J aja I oO bh o E La Ea o C a p or iplqris tujvuuixiyz ti 3 p 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 143 wsol lela o oo aa govern 160 17 ara l a AS tora ia PERA A EA HI gt ii Ii IA AA ala ea o e eeM Ta ro riml 1 olaa rmsloyrson desen 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 cs ealel pde e e ia a Double size character code A Pe Line feed code Shade characters can not be printed by the built in printer display only 128 143 G de 120 Programming This chapter explains how to program various items SD CARD MODE Before you start programming select the PGM1 PGM2 or SD CARD mode from the mode selection screen depending on the item you are g
35. 100 00 e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for gratuity Up to 12 characters can be entered e SIGN Use the selective entry method The or sign assigns the premium or discount function for the gratuity Minus discount Plus premium e TAXABLE1 thru 5 Use the selective entry method YES Taxable NO Non taxable Program each item as follows e RATE Use the numeric entry method Percent rate 0 00 to 100 00 e TEXT CASH Use the character entry method Description for the cash tip Up to 12 characters can be entered e TEXT CHR Use the character entry method Description for the non cash tip Up to 12 characters can be entered e HALO High Amount Lockout use the numeric entry method A Significant digit for HALO 1 thru 9 B Number of zeros to follow the significant digit for HALO 0 thru 8 AB is the same as Ax 10B You can also select a tip key by pressing the corresponding key when it has been placed directly on the keyboard instead of selecting the key from the menu 149 E RA Procedure Program each item as follows Select the desired received on e HALO High Amount Lockout use the numeric entry method account key from the RA keys list A Significant digit for HALO 1 thru 9 B Number of zeros to follow the significant digit for HALO 0 thru 8 AB is the same as Ax 10B e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for the received on account key
36. 629 50 P00045 PLOO04S 20 0005 900 00 UPC 9099887654302 ITEM A 20 000S 5099887654303 E PLU UPC zero sales report full E PLU UPC minimum stock report 12 06 2008 000001 1730 5 06PM JACK0002 R0127 X1 PLU ZERO SALES 12 06 2008 000001 1800 10 40AM JACK0002 8 xX 1 PLU FP 00022 FP 00024 F 00026 00027 FP 00028 F 00029 P0003 00033 P00034 P00035 P00036 P00037 P00038 P00039 P00040 P00041 P00042 P00043 P00044 PLO0022 PLOO024 PLO0026 PLO0027 PLO0028 PL00029 PL00031 PL00033 PLO0034 PLOOO35 PLO0036 PL00037 PL00038 PL00039 PL00040 PLO004 PLO0042 PL00043 PLO0044 509988 7654305 1 TEN N 909988 7654306 17EM P PLU code Item label 01 PLU MINIMUM STOCK Range 00001 P00019 PLU code PLOO01g P00020 Item label PL00020 em Bae A A A A ey me A nm mm A A A A ie UPC 0998876543024 ITEM A E PLU UPC zero sales by dept report 12 06 2008 1563 0127 8 10AM PLU ZERO SALES PL00022 SS ee ee ee eee ee 509988 7654303 1TEN B 509988 7654304 1 TEM H PLU code Associated dept code Item label E PLU UPC price category report e Sample X report 12 06 2008 000001 1823 11 56AM HIKEOOO1 0129 Xx 1 PLU PRICE CATEGORY 1 50 5 00 Price range PLU P00001 MILK 22 0040 36 00 P00002 PL00002 322 0040 650 00 P00003 PLO0003 30 0090 114 85 P00004 PL00004 35 0020 145 00 P00005 PLO0005 40 01
37. 64 0 00 FIN BAL 503 86 MW X1 Z1 stacked reports You can print multiple X1 Z1 reports in sequence under a single report job number In this case you need to program in advance which X1 Z1 reports should be printed Refer to Stacked report under the section Report Programming in Chapter 13 109 Periodic Consolidation Your POS terminal allows you to take consolidation X and Z reports of a chosen period the period is usually one week or month General overview The periodic reading or resetting reports are the same in format as those in the X1 Z1 report for daily sales information except mode indication X2 or Z2 E Transaction report e Sample X report e Sample Z report 12 06 2008 000002 12 06 2008 000002 2054 2 44PH JACK0002 2050 2 39PH JACK0002 0230 xX2 Read symbol 0230 Lor TRANSACTION Report title TRANSACTION TRANS 21 0005 0002 00000154443 01 00000155077 14 00000000634 13 00000000000 00 The subsequent printouts are the same in format as those in the X Z report on daily totals 0 Reset symbol Report title Reset counter of periodic consolidation Grand totals E Daily net report e Sample X report 12 06 2008 R2041 11 15PM 0270 x2 000002 JACK0002 DAILY NET 11 01 1020 11 02 820 11 03 1420 11 29 2050 11 30 1030 TOTAL 37140 5305 60 3457 20 6041 58 10747 20 5470 00 1820
38. 9 If the number 0 is entered no data will be sent to the remote printer e CHIT RECEIPT Use the selective entry method YES Prints on the chit receipt in the remote printer format NO Prints nothing on the chit receipt e DATA ENT JOB Use the numeric entry method Key data entry job no Capture job no O thru 99 When 0 is programmed data capture entry is inhibited e CARD PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the card number NO Does not print the card number e CARD HOLDER PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the name of the card holder NO Does not print the name of the card holder e EXPIRATION PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the card expiration date NO Does not print the card expiration date You can also select a food stamp tender key by pressing the corresponding key when it has been placed directly on the keyboard instead of selecting the key from the menu 10 E Cash benefit by EBT CASH BNF key 2 43AM Procedure MEDIA y EE E 01 CASH 02 CHECK 03 CHARGE 04 FS TEND 06 CONVERSION 07 EAT IN 08 SERVICE LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 CASH BENEFIT TEXT GLU PBLU HEADER ON BILL NO FOOTER ON BILL NO CLOSED GC NO RETAINED BILL PRINT NON COMPULSORY FOOTER ON RCPT NO NON ADD PGH2 wr 7 P DOWN Y Q 2 43AM NON COMPULSORY The screen continues Program each item as follows e TEXT Use the char
39. CURRENCY CONVESSO KEV S can a AE rcciceiis 173 Ea OWS e PR A To 173 SENCE o a A acord edi toate 174 A A A 176 A e eae memes auaaueee tee 178 check cnan een Mate ae ieee A 178 Eo A e eunteeammeeasamemneoeue nena 179 Currency denominations MONEY occccnccnncccnncccccnnnncnnccnnononnncnnnnnnnnonnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanannnnenons 181 TEMPLO AMM A sh eucuacateies cate eta eecuies 182 A A A re er N 183 Department group Tx e Cosi eeee neers 185 PLUCIIOU Dir as 185 SEN erOrOUD Aexo lila lla bits a e a csi oaass tids 186 Message TEXT sensira eaaeo indebidas ci 186 Personnel Programmid spa se icion a a loans O 187 A e A ica 187 E A se teaneen EE A 188 terminal Programm paa os roda corea cil aaa 189 ME ei te tt ale r cM it es ha ty ales 190 Consecutive Number avi ii A a A ates 190 o A eeeeaetecdacne 190 DEA MEA dada 191 Avala DIC GLU COJE nd lt dais 191 BN VOT DS ence sets e aa ins 191 BYES UNS So cam tesa teeta le et on areata acne ee ad cece A etaeeceeene 191 Date VS SeN tt id 192 E ater tiie alte ita etl iE cial ae ue ee 192 Optional Feature Selec a A o O e id A Ad bd 193 Function PROMIDITION it ii 194 UNCON SCICCHON T tl dio ide cis 196 FUNCIONA o o 197 A a a somade cs a eased te laaeeiand ds ieee hdutie aay 199 Secret Code PrOJAMMINO 2d cata a a e AadecetecudadeasaabicealeteniscttiMeseteasiectoahecteieuees 201 Vda Vid Rae eee eS a eae re ore ee ee eee 202 PGM2ZAMmOde ODeralONS execs ences lt o ld edi
40. CUSTOMER BY AMI printed instead of X2 0 01 9999999 99 Sales range 0000000035521 Customer code NAME 4194 Name ADDRESS 41 94 Address 3Q Sales q ty and total CHARGE Charge account 12 12 2008 Date 31123456 78905 AAAOOO 10 Sales items 0000000065321 NAME 65321 ADDRESS 65321 57 52 10 CHARGE 0 00 12 12 2008 P00002 PLO00002 1 230 57 50 FP 00003 PL00003 1 170 52 70 P00003 PLO0003 1 170 52 70 SUBTOTAL 60 261 28 Subtotal on the report CHARGE 89 38 TOTAL 60 261 28 The full total on the customer file CHARGE 89 38 E Customer charge account report MW X2 Z2 stacked report You can print multiple X2 Z2 reports in sequence under R0288 x2 a single transaction In this case you need to program CHARGE ACCOUNT in advance which X2 Z2 reports should be printed Refer to Stacked report under Report Programming C d o pee seo in Chapter 13 Programming ADDRESS 20 Address CHARGE 0000000000075 NAME 75 ADDRESS 75 CHARGE SUBTOTAL CHARGE When you take a Z report Z2 is e r TOTAL printed instead of X2 CHARGE ie Electronic journal This function is intended to record the journal data in the electronic paper For details consult your authorized SHARP dealer e Recording data The POS terminal records the printing output to the journal printer in REG PGM1 PGM2 X1 Z1 and X2 Z2 modes into the electronic journ
41. CYCLE 0 00 INITIAL TAX 0 00 LOWER LIMIT 0 00 BREAK POINTI 0 00 BREAK POINT2 0 00 BREAK POINT3 0 00 BREAK POINT4 0 00 NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 2 14PM The screen continues Program each item as follows e TAX RATE Use the numeric entry method Tax rate for the tax table max 7 digits 0 0000 to 999 9999 e CYCLE Use the numeric entry method Range of the minimum breakpoint on a regular cycle for the tax table max 4 digits 0 01 to 99 99 See the description of M on the previous page e INITIAL TAX Use the numeric entry method Initial tax amount for the tax table max 3 digits 0 01 to 9 99 See the description of T on the previous page e LOWER LIMIT Use the numeric entry method Minimum taxable amount for the tax table max 5 digits 0 01 to 999 99 See the description of Q on the previous page e BREAK POINT1 thru 72 Use the numeric entry method Breakpoints programmable for the tax table max 5 digits 0 01 to 999 99 72 breakpoints can be programmed for each tax table When the interval between breakpoints is one dollar or more and less than one hundred dollars 36 breakpoints are programmed for each tax table 231 E Rate tax You can program a tax rate for each tax rate number Procedure Select a pertinent tax no from the Program each item as follows taxes list e TAX RATE Use the numeric entry method Tax rate max 7 digits 0 0000 to 999 9999
42. DEL key 1 16PH 225 POSITIVE PUO 0000000000000001 0000000000000002 ARENE GEST BESOS RODIN Wi v 0000000000000002 The DELETE window appears e Press the key Message ARE YOU SURE appears e Select YES and press the key e To cancel the deletion select NO and press the key To end the deletion procedure press the fowo key 226 Macro Key Programming Use the following procedure for macro key programming E Mode position Auto key no The Macro Key Function is used to run a series of instructions with a single key stroke You can program up to 15 modes auto key numbers for each macro key Procedure SETTING TI E 17 NEGATIVES 18 POSITIVES 20 FUNCTION KEY 21 CAPTURE KEY 22 CAPTURE JOBH 23 TAX 24 TRAINING PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE MACRO KEY 2 MACRO 2 3 MACRO 3 4 HACRO 4 PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE Select a pertinent favre macro key MACROn1 y MODE 1 KEY 1 INHIBIT NODE 2 INHIBIT KEY 2 INHIBIT NODE 3 INHIBIT KEY 3 INHIBIT NODE 4 KEY 4 PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN PGM2 MIKE Program the item as follows e MACRO 1 thru MACRO 4 Use the selective entry method Select the pertinent macro key from the list e MODE 1 thru MODE 15 Use the selective entry method INHIBIT AUTO key is inhibited PGM2 PGM2 mode PGM1 PGM1 mode OPXZ OP X Z mode RE
43. EFT Use the selective entry method Select the ACTION CODE from the following options AUTH ONLY DIAL POST AUTH o a E Check cashing continued EFT TYPE Use the selective entry method Select the transaction type GIFT CARD CHECK DEBIT CREDIT e ACCT Use the selective entry method ONLINE COMPULSORY OFFLINE COMPULSORY CARD RD COMPULSORY e ACCT NEGATIVE Use the selective entry method NO YES ACCT POSITIVE Use the selective entry method NO YES e CARD PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the card number NO Does not print the card number e SIGN LINE PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the signature line NO Does not print the signature line e CARD HOLDER PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the name of the card holder NO Does not print the name of the card holder e EXPIRATION PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the card expiration date NO Does not print the card expiration date e NUMBER OF RCPT Use the numeric entry method Number of authorization receipts to be issued 1 digit 1 to 9 If the number 0 is entered no authorization receipt is issued e PRINT LALO Use the numeric entry method LALO for gift card authorization receipt printing 00 00 99 99 e IC CARD Use the selective entry method YES Enables IC card entry NO Disables IC card entry 180 E Currency denominations MONEY You can
44. HOLD RECALL LEVEL L1 thru L5 PRICE SHIFT P1 thru 6 You can change the default texts in the PGM2 mode 16 DISF o DSC Q o oO mb Q QO Z CAICHKI om E gt U O gt me o O Y AG El D 7 A 9 JI elele pe ESSAGE ey Q D3SF O O Q Z ls oO lt oO 2 Es 9 I gt Q N CA CHK9 EATIN Ail ESSAGE on gt op 30 oe CAS X m O A m 9 O CHARG Default text TAX1SF thru TAX5SF GD1SFT thru GD3SFT GROUP DISC1 thru 3 1 thru 9 1 thru 9 CONV1 thru CONV4 RA RA2 PO PO2 CA CHK 1 thru CA CHK 9 EATIN1 thru 3 MSG1 thru 5 CAP 1 thru 10 GAS1 ST thru GAS28 ST CA2 thru CA5 CHECK thru CHECK9 CHG1 thru CHG9 Drawer lock key This key locks and unlocks the cash drawer To lock it turn 90 degrees counter clockwise To unlock it turn 90 degrees clockwise This key is also used to open the cash drawer Please refer to 15 Operator Maintenance Operating the Drawer by Hand Sy O _Jvv Display El Operator display touch panel e Screen example 1 REG mode Information area 2 Scroll guidance Cursor up key Main display area l 2 PLOODOS 10 00 1 DPT O1 23 00 1 DPT O Z 12 50 HDSE ST 54 00 TAAL 3 24 xxx TOTAL 97 248 Keyboard area CASH 60 00 CHANGE 2 76 HUME MENU NM PILI Information area 1 Num
45. JACK0002 12 08 2008 1809 4 45PM 0120 X 1 000001 0120 Z1 PLU UPC LU coe PLU UPE PLU l tem label for PLU UPE 21 22 RT 324 0040 656 00 prada ma WASTE 2o00 do rs The subsequent printout occurs CP 2 0000 2 00 NET Sp 650 00 33 09 FP 00003 PLO0003 32 0090 122 85 RF 2 0000 6 00 UP 2 0000 2 00 NET SLS 30 0090 for price level 1 sample X report Coupon counter and total for price level 1 Net sales for price level 1 J 1 If you need these information please consult your dealer P00010 PLOO010 11 0080 190 00 P00004 PLOO004 35 0020 148 00 HASTE 1 0000 10 00 4 cp 1 0000 2 50 cP 3 0000 3 00 NET SLS 10 0080 177 50 NET SLS 35 0020 145 00 me at h me ee ee ee a m ee ee e e i P00005 Total sales q ty and PLOOOOS 40 0100 249 75 COMBO TL 0 0000 0 00 total sales amount CP 2 0000 2 00 WASTE TL 3 0000 14 00 for price level 1 NET SLS 40 0100 247 75 i 0 71 ian RF TL 2 0000 6 00 PLOOODS 15 0030 106 20 iL dn ain CP 1 0000 2 50 l 100 00 A A A o ee ee lr mr a NET SLS 15 0030 103 70 P00007 5 j PL00007 21 0010 152 95 ari date 71 25 CP 2 0000 1 00 l NET SLS 5 0120 71 25 309988 76543034 TEM B 2 0000 7 00 NET SLS 2 0000 7 00 909988 7654304 ITEM M 4 0000 18 00 N
46. MACHINE Program the item as follows e RECEIPT LOGO Use the character entry method Logo text for the receipt max 30 characters x 6 lines The number of lines available for a message varies according to the message type the 3 line header message type 3 line footer message type 6 line header message type and Stamp only type Please consult your authorized SHARP dealer PGH2 E Validation printing text Your POS terminal can print programmed validation messages Procedure VP TEXT FOR DEPOSIT ONLY Program the item as follows e VP TEXT Use the character entry method Text for the validation slip max 30 characters x 3 lines PREV PGH2 MIKE 212 E Bill logo Your POS terminal can print programmed messages for customers on the bill Shown below is an example of selecting 1 HEADER Procedure BILL LOGO na a 2 FOOTER When 1 HEADER is selected e HEADER Use the character entry method Header text for the bill max 40 characters x 3 lines When 2 FOOTER is selected PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PG 2 MIKE a e FOOTER Use the character entry method Footer text for the bill max 30 characters x 6 lines If ti is assumed that you have selected 1 aa HEADER Header Footer text for bill printer programming HEADER PREV PGN2 MIKE E Scrolling message for pole display Your POS terminal can display a
47. Negative no PGM2 25 POSITIVE Positive no PGM2 26 AUTO KEY Automatic sequencing key PGM2 27 MACRO KEY Macro key PGM2 28 CAPTURE KEY Capture key PGM2 29 CAPTURE JOB Capture job PGM2 30 DEVICE CONFIG Device configuration PGM2 31 DIRECT KEY Direct key PGM2 32 FUNCTION KEY Function key PGM2 33 FUNCTION MENU KEY Function menu key PGM2 34 PLU MENU KEY PLU menu key PGM2 247 E Sample printouts e Departments PGM1 or PGM2 mode Date Consecutive number Operating mode Report type Dept code Item label Tax status Server group no Group discount status 1 2 3 12 06 2008 000001 1437 1 47PH NIKEOOO1 2 PG DEPARTMENT DO DPT O 1 0 KP00000 0 KP00000 T 00 0000010 000 S0 KP00000 D04 D10 DPT 1O T 00 0000010 000 S0 00 KP00000 L1 10 Machine number Server name server code Time Key data entry job no Unit price Group no Age limitation CVM control character HALO LALO Print station Function programming 000003 L Type of unit price entry open amp preset preset open inhibit Gas BR Hash Normal SIF SICS Normal Scale status compulsory enable inhibit Tara table no Validation printing compulsory non compulsory Minus department When you take this report in the PGM1 mode PGM is replaced by PGM1 248 PLU UPC PGM1 or PGM2 mode Report type Dept code PLU code Zero price allowed disallowed Condiment
48. No receipt is issued e Is the paper roll properly installed e Is there a paper jam e Is the Receipt ON OFF function in the OFF state e s the terminal set properly to the REG mode No journal paper is taken up e Is the take up spool installed on the bearing properly e Is there a paper jam Printing is unusual e Is the print head release lever in the printing position e Is there a paper jam List of Options The following options are available for your POS terminal For further information contact your authorized SHARP dealer Do not try to install any option yourself 1 Remote customer display model UP P20DPB 2 Remote drawer model ER 03DW B7 or ER 04DW 3 Remote coin case model ER 55CC2 or ER 75CC3 4 RAM memory board model UP S04MB2 5 Magnetic card reader model UP E13MR3 6 Key kit models You can change the keyboard layout or increase the number of departments using the following key kits ER 11KT8 30 regular size key kit ER 12KT8 30 1x2 size key kit ER 22KT8 10 2x2 size key kit ER 11DK8B 30 regular size dummy key kit ER 51DK8B 10 5x1 size dummy key kit 2 72 iFa Specifications External dimensions 14 1 W X17 6 D X14 7 H in 358 W X 447 D X 374 H mm Including the touch panel Weight 31 3 lbs 14 2 kg Power consumption Stand by 21W Operating 52 W max Operating temperature 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C Built in battery Rechargeable battery pack memory retention time
49. Only available to the manager PUBLIC Available to the manager and servers cashiers 194 E Function prohibition continued e INDIRECT VOID GLU Use the selective entry method DISABLE Disables indirect void refund return entry in GLU re order ENABLE Enables indirect void refund return entry in GLU re order e OPEN GLU DISPLAY Use the selective entry method DISABLE Does not display currently opened GLU automatically ENABLE Displays and recalls the balances of currently opened GLU automatically e UPC LEARNING Use the selective entry method DISABLE Disables the UPC learning function ENABLE Enables the UPC learning function e PRICE CHANGE Use the selective entry method LIMITED Only available to the manager PUBLIC Available to the manager and servers cashiers e CUSTOMER LEARNING Use the selective entry method ENABLE Only available to the manager DISABLE Available to the manager and servers cashiers e CUSTOMER TEL Use the selective entry method DISABLE Disables the learning function of customer telephone numbers ENABLE Enables the learning function of customer telephone numbers 195 WE Function selection 1 Your POS terminal enables you to select various functional settings Program each item as follows Procedure e ITEM VP Use the selective entry method DISABLE Disables item validation printing ENABLE Enables item validation printing FUNC SELECTI RF RT
50. SIOCK DICK UD TEDO essa ana ai a a 98 PLU UPC zero sales report ful est cxe ces nace nssedern cs devartet seas taceemenscnenetactecceelaede regen sienetenctanbesieacedevaiaanseatecace 99 PLU UPC Zero sales by dept report rustacasamos ad 99 PEU WP C minimum stock repollo coclear 99 PLUMP GC Price Category Fe OOM aiii 100 aS hist rawr TEDO 3 5 xehie solace ld el deca oat 100 Positive check Ep a s 100 Dynamic UPC report by designated range ccccccccccocccnnncocononcnnnncononcnnonnonononnnnnnnononnnrnnnnnnnnannrnnnnnonanennnnoss 101 Dynamic UP C pICK UD TE DOM sates a td acura bas 101 Dynamic UPC report by associated department oooccccccccoconcnnccccconnncnnnnnononcnnnncononancnnnnnonannnnnnnnnonanennnnnss 102 TACTO arresta a ias plc octcoules cid 103 Key Capture Te DO still 103 Farol WACe U Fe IRs ate im DORA E ia 104 FUI SERVER REDON alesse oe aes 105 SGM Starling cash Memory report e dd 105 HOLY FE OM lt 5 ccoecacecne esters E a 106 EP A A IA iis wee 107 GLUJPBEU TODON DY SCIVO cursos illa 107 Closed GLUP BLU TEDO careia r is 108 Closed GLU PBLU report by Server scere ase e A eenean ea ea a EE ae A ESRA EERE 109 XZT STACK SG Teno cit 109 Periodic CONS MAI le And e o 110 Hansaci ntepor it ii do lid 110 Daly net re DOI nia ib 111 customer Sales EDO oc doo iitcia 112 Customer sales report by Sales range ooncccccccccconconcnocnoncnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnanrnnnnnnnanas 113 Customer Charg
51. Server name Server code Consecutive no _ _ __ o 0 Time PLO0004 4 00 L00005 u 00 PLOOO 10 vainly PLO0006 6 00 DPT O 1 12 50 IPT O2 23 00 MDSE ST 55 50 TAK 1 20 ee TOTAL 56 70 Sales total CASH 60 00 t Cash amount tendered CHANGE 3 30 Change due 94 Prior to Entries Preparations for Entries E Receipt Journal paper rolls If the paper rolls are not installed in the built in printer of your POS terminal install a new one ones according to section Installing and Removing the Paper Roll under Operator Maintenance If the roll in the printer is getting low replace it with a new one E Receipt ON OFF function You can disable receipt printing in the REG mode to save paper using the receipt On Off function To disable receipt printing press the key and then touch the key Set the function to OFF by pressing the key When this function is in the OFF state the Receipt Off Indicator R is highlighted To enable receipt printing touch RCP ON OFF with this function in the OFF state Your POS terminal will print reports regardless of the state of the Receipt ON OFF function This means that the paper roll s must be installed even when the Receipt ON OFF function is preset to OFF Error Warning In the following examples your POS terminal will go into an error state accompanied by a warning beep an
52. The text for the associated department is applied to the UPC code e You can use the UPC learning function in the training mode This may be convenient to practice on the scanning system e Using the UPC learning function you can store necessary data for new UPC codes in the training mode for later use in the REG mode Procedure UNDEFINED CODE is displayed with beep sounds and price input window is displayed When the unit price is zero Dept code input window Delete method selection or in case of non PLU type is displayed window is displayed UPC code having price info or related to press code Scanning an undefined UPC code __ Undefined Puno UPC code Unit price gt a or Dept code gt eter omar or To cancel the operation Selection of delete method Select 1 AUTO DELETE when you want to exempt the UPC code entered from the non accessed UPC delete function deletion by selecting DELETE option from UPC DELETE menu in Z1 mode Ma or repeat entry use the ex key Key Operation Print UNDEFINED CODE is gt 2099887654302 10 16 2008 000001 displayed 750 1218 10 51AM JACK0002 y 5998876543024 Select 1 AUTO DELETE DPT O5 7 50 MDSE SI 7 50 TAX 0 45 CASH 7 95 A459 E PLU UPC price inquiry view function This function displays the unit price of a PLU UPC item view mode Procedure The total sales amount of the nning
53. VP e RF RT VP Use the selective entry method ATA NON COMPULSORY COMPULSORY Compulsory refund return validation printing RA VP NON COMPULSORY NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory refund return validation printing PO VP NON COMPULSORY 74 Nan eo aaa e VP Use the selective entry method EUS ME salle COMPULSORY Compulsory minus entry validation printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory minus entry validation printing The screen continues e CA CHK VP Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Compulsory cashing a check validation printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory cashing a check validation printing e RA VP Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Compulsory RA validation printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory RA validation printing e PO VP Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Compulsory PO validation printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory PO validation printing e TIP VP Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Compulsory tip validation printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory tip validation printing e LEVEL SHIFT TYPE Use the selective entry method MANUAL Lock shift mode AUTO Automatic return mode e LEVEL SHIFT Use the selective entry method LIMITED Only available to the manager PUBLIC Available to the manager and servers cashiers e PRICE SHIFT TYPE Use the selective entry method MANUAL Lock shift mode AUTO Automatic return mode e PRICE SHIFT Use the selective entr
54. allowed I Taxable 2 and 5iteM prohibited 1DPT O1 30 00 Taxable 3 and 4 item n n nnana nnana allowed debas ST e Taxable 3 and biteM prohibited TAX 1 20 Taxable 4 and 5BiteM allowed CASH 333 00 In case of Tax 1 PST Tax 2 PST Tax 3 GST Tax 4 GST Tax 5 PST TAX 3 00 SBTL 33 00 Taxable 1 and 2 teM prohibited a ron ii eere Taxable 1 and 3 lteM allowed Taxable 1 and 4 teM allowed Taxable 1 and 5item prohibited Taxable 2 and 3 lteM allowed Taxable 2 and 4 teM allowed Taxable 2 and 5item prohibited Taxable 3 and 4 1teM prohibited Taxable 3 and 5 lteM allowed Taxable 4 and 5iteM allowed Guest Check GLU PBLU Two different guest check entry systems are available the GLU system and previous balance lookup PBLU system lt depends on how your POS terminal has been programmed which of these is used Consult your authorized SHARP dealer for this selection GLU system If this system is selected the balance due and details of the order are saved in the guest check file The information can be recalled for additional ordering or finalization by pressing the key or entering a GLU code PBLU system If this system is selected the previous balance is stored in the previous balanc
55. code at any point during a transaction Normally customer information name code and address is previously set by programming However you can enter information on a new customer during a transaction When an undefined customer code is entered the message UNDEFINED CODE is displayed then you can enter the customer s name and address which are saved in the customer file For the customer registered you can defer his her payment Take a tentative finalization procedure using the CH 1 key The sales amount is added to the charge amount for the customer When the customer settles his her charge account take a received on account entry procedure Procedure Scanning customer code aust Name entry gt or Address entry gt or Customer code ENTER Sales registration max 13 digits sata 16 characters max 40 characters i I I kkk Scan the customer code on a Customer Card provided to the customer or enter the EAN 13 format bar code The customer code can be entered by the optional magnet card reader When an entered customer code does not exist in the customer file UNDEFINED CODE is displayed for a moment with beep sound Then the NAME entry window entered appears and prompts the operator to enter the customer s name The ADDRESS entry window is displayed Kk e Customer code entry is inhibited after payment operation e When the wrong code is entered take
56. del de 202 SV SUCHE Z POO US aone AA A a 203 System PGM2 Mmode operations asias 203 Initial down loading with clearing Of memory ccccccseeseeccececeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeseeueeeeeeesaaeeeeeeesseaaeeeeeeeeas 204 Maintenance down loading without clearing Of memory ccccccconccccnnccnnnnnccncnconnnnncononnnnanccnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnos 204 AOKO UE PC A 205 ao ci o A EA 206 LAO A a ds 207 A alle ke eas i ale al a ue le ek eco eee ea 207 SIACK EG TEDO aa naa eaters onto A 208 LOTO Texti Programming a 211 o cetaerinecctunrmeeetesticeet ipa le wears shed sale Grand Hou uae a A 212 Nello Po o test lt OA teen cediesk yatag pues teeneoahieiens 212 A dusnda tote inen te teda eds pened a 213 Scrolling message for pole diSplay coococonnncnccnnnccccnnnononnncncnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnenons 213 Device Configuration Program ad o 214 A retarted ee etree one ren mere eR ae leer eae ee ce eee 215 NOUN Mal PANE eiss e A o bi Lie aed daeri a 215 Extemal Jota ostia 215 14 15 A salam A E a 216 JA A ner ten et herr a a O Sete a acer eee eee eee ne 216 A A es 217 Nel nett oe nectethat veda sGantacedencacns neha aoaueatieSankeneedcntarnaceacte watenen A 217 Remote PALER KPa TAG ARO iia 218 BORASGANNER rt be eal teal aie luca eal ant teeth ua e tals 218 Pol displasia ll Aad te dint he aid 219 GLU Code Progr ain dept aaa 220 Customer Programming e sezsa a Aenean do eet de 221 7016 any 810 dt
57. discount key by pressing the corresponding key when it has been placed directly on the keyboard instead of selecting the key from the menu 145 E Percent key thru f Procedure Select the desired percent key from the percent keys list TAXABLE1 TAXABLE2 TAXABLE3 TAXABLE4 TAXABLES PREV PGH2 MIKE 41 FS CASH BNF GROUP DISCOUNT1 GROUP DISCOUNT2 GROUP DISCOUNTS ZHALO ENTRY TYPE ENTRY IN REG DATA ENT JOB PREV PGH2 MIKE The screen continues Program each item as follows e RATE Use the numeric entry method Percent rate 0 00 to 100 00 e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for the percent key Up to 12 characters can be entered e SIGN Use the selective entry method Programming of the or sign assigns the premium or discount function to each percent key Minus discount Plus premium e TAXABLE1 thru 5 Use the selective entry method YES Taxable NO Non taxable e FS CASH BNF Use the selective entry method Food stamp cash benefit status NO Food stamp cash benefit ineligible YES Food stamp cash benefit eligible e GROUP DISCOUNT 1 thru 3 Use the selective entry method Group discount status NO Non discountable YES Discountable e HALO High Amount Lockout use the numeric entry method HALO High Amount Lockout for the percent key 0 00 to 100 00 e ENTRY TYPE Use the selective entry method ITEM Item SBTL Subtotal
58. e ENTRY IN REG Use the selective entry method YES Allows a discount entry in the REG mode NO Inhibits a discount entry in the REG mode e DATA ENT JOB Use the numeric entry method Key data entry job number Capture job number O thru 99 When 0 is programmed data entry is inhibited e PLU1 thru 20 Use the numeric entry method Program PLU code which the corresponding key 1 thru 99999 For the Markdown entry item The entry will be allowed only for a PLU which is listed in this table For the Discount entry ST The entry will be allowed only when all PLUs listed in this table have been entered You can also select a percent key by pressing the corresponding key when it has been placed directly on the keyboard instead of selecting the key from the menu 146 E Group discount key kso thru Program each item as follows e RATE Use the numeric entry method Percent rate 0 00 to 100 00 e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for the group discount key Up to 12 characters can be Select the desired key from the group discount keys list entered e TEXT ST Use the character entry method Description for group subtotal Up to 12 characters can be entered TEN e SIGN Use the selective entry method A ALE Programming of the or sign assigns the premium or discount TAXABLE2 function to each group discount key a t Minus discount Plus pre
59. entry e current a eee eee gt puto price level Level no 1 to 6 Q ty Con etc Direct PLU e If you select the automatic return mode it is not necessary to use the key on the keyboard If you select the lock shift mode it is necessary to use the key e When you use the FF method PLU you need not press the key for a multiplication entry E Combo meal entries The operation is the same as for normal PLU entries When a combo meal is entered with a combo function key the labels of those PLUs linked to the combo key can be printed automatically The sum of all adjusted prices of the PLUs linked to the combo key is the combo meal price e When a combo meal is entered with a combo key the quantity totalizer of the combo key and the amount totalizers of the linked PLUs are updated e When the key is pressed with the cursor pointing at a combo meal selected the combo meal entry of 1st price level is voided and the combo meal of 2nd price level is registered E Condiment entries for PLU Your POS terminal may be programmed to prompt you to condiment and preparatory instructions for a menu item PLU Example When you enter a menu item PLU a prompting message such as HOW COOK and a list of the Following PLUS will appear You must specify one of the Following PLUs such as without mustard to meet a special order of the guest In an example of the condiment table shown below it is assume
60. entry method CA CHKI COMPULSORY Compulsory non add code entry TEXT 99999 99 MS ani Non conpui ciry MAAE NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory non add code entry NEGATIVE CHECK NO role ia ciel i aA e NEGATIVE CHECK Use the selective entry method A ae a ae YES Enables the negative check function Any code non add code existing in the negative file is treated as invalid The negative check function can be overridden depending upon the programming NO Disables the negative check function The screen continues e POSITIVE Use the selective entry method YES Enables the positive check function Any code non add code existing in the positive file is treated as valid NO Disables the positive check function e DATA ENT JOB Use the numeric entry method Key data entry job no Capture job no O thru 99 When 0 is programmed data capture entry is inhibited e EXPIRATION PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the card expiration date NO Does not print the card expiration date e NUMBER OF RCPT Use the numeric entry method Number of authorization receipts to be issued 1 digit 1 to 9 If the number 0 is entered no authorization receipt is issued e EFT ACCT PROG Use the selective entry method You can select EFT ACCT compulsory or non compulsory NOT COMPULSORY Non compulsory EFT ACCT EFT COMPULSORY Compulsory EFT ACCT COMPULSORY Compulsory ACCT e
61. meal key where a function key has been previously programmed For more information please consult your authorized SHARP dealer 141 PLU Menu Key Programming Use the following procedure for PLU menu key programming E PLU menu key When you enter PLUs using the PLU menu key makes it easy to find categorized PLU items from the menu list Your POS terminal allows you to program a max of 50 PLU menu keys You can program a max of 15 PLUs sub menus for each PLU menu key Procedure SETTING 01 ARTICLE 02 DIRECT KEY 03 PLU MENU KEY 04 FUNCTION Use the following procedure to program a PLU menu key In the SETTING window select O3 PLU MENU KEY and program each item as follows 05 MEDIA ce PERSONAL e PLU MENU KEY Use the numeric entry method 08 TERMINAL PLU menu key number 1 thru 50 NEXT LIST P DOWN Y 1 thru 50 For the direct PLU menu key PGH2 PLU MENU KEY 01 PLUOO1 02 PLU MENUO2 Select a PLU menu key and press or enter the correpanding key no 03 TEXT AFTER MENU ENTRY AUTO RETURN e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for the PLU menu key Up to 16 characters can be entered e AFTER MENU ENTRY Use the selective entry method AUTO RETURN The display returns to the home menu after menu entry STAY DOWN The current window stays open after menu entry ORES REST FLESHY A i 12 56PM e PLU or MENU Use th
62. not print footer graphic logo E Journal printer Procedure JOURNAL PRINTER i PRINTER net Journal printer is fixed to BUILT IN PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE E External journal Procedure XTERNAL JOURNAL PRINTER Program each item as follows e PRINTER Use the selective entry method Select the printer to be used from the following TM 1T88 3 T88 4 TM U220 230 TM T90 PGN2 If you want to access the EXTERNAL JOURNAL window please consult your authorized SHARP dealer 215 E Receipt printer Procedure RECEIPT PRINTER PUP AUTO CUTTER TRAY ST FEED 0 Program each item as follows e AUTO CUTTER Use the selective entry method Auto cutter function YES Enables the auto cutter function NO Disables the auto cutter function PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE e TRAY ST FEED Use the numeric entry method Number of lines to be fed for a tray subtotal 0 to 9 Receipt printer is fixed to BUILT IN E Bill printer Procedure BILL PRINTER Program each item as follows AUTO CUTTER e PRINTER Use the selective entry method Ee Ray HME Select the printer to be used BUILT IN built in printer EPSON TM 295 EPSON TM T88 3 4 LOGO PREV EPSON TM T88 3 88 4 EPSON TM U220 230 PGN2 MIKE EPSON TM T90 e AUTO CUTTER Use the selective entry method Auto cutter function YES Enables the auto cutter function NO Disables t
63. o Recall 4 Finalization TAX 0 00 SBTL 0 00 JACK HOME MENU 0002 P1L1 1 46PH y 1 PL00006 6 00 1 PLO0007 7 00 TAX 0 78 SBTL 13 78 Y PL00007 HOHE MENU 0002 7 00 P1L1 1 4 PH y 1 PL00004 4 00 1 PL00005 5 00 MDSE ST 9 00 TAX1 0 54 CASH 9 54 TAX 0 54 SBTL 9 54 JACK HOME MENU P1L1 i y 1 PLO0006 6 00 1 PLO0007 7 00 1 PL00008 8 00 MDSE ST 21 00 TAX1 1 26 CASH 22 26 TAX 1 26 SBTL 22 26 JACK HOME MENU P1L1 1 48PH 53 Finalization of Transaction E Cash or Check tendering Press the key to get the tax inclusive subtotal enter the amount tendered by your customer then press any of the thru keys if it is a cash tender or press any of the thru key if it is a check tender When the amount tendered is greater than the amount of the sale your POS terminal will show the amount of change due and the symbol CHANGE Otherwise your POS terminal will show the symbol DUE and the deficit amount To settle the deficit amount another tender amount equal to or equal to or exceeding the amount due must be en tered Mou You can also enter a check or cash tender from the check or cash menu window Press the on key and select the desired check or cash media key and enter the amount E Mixed tendering check cash Mixed tendering of check and cash is possible After pressing the key enter the amount tendered by your customer in check or cash and press the corres
64. of about one month with fully charged built in battery pack at 77 F 25 C Keyboard Normal keyboard Operator display Color LCD module and touch panel 400 W X 240 H dots Other functions Graphic logo printing function Logo message function Paper feed function Paper 22 6 0 02 in 57 5 0 5 mm ds 3 15 in 80 mm High quality 0 06 to 0 08 mm thickness Accessories Hardware Operation Manual 1 copy Paper roll 2 Take up spool 1 Drawer lock keys 2 Specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice for improvement 273 NOTICE PLEASE BE SURE TO ASK ABOUT THE WARRANTY THAT AN AUTHORIZED DEALER EXTENDS TO YOU In order to assure you the end user of warranty protection Sharp extends a limited warranty to each of its authorized dealers and in turn requires each of its authorized dealers to extend its own warranty to you on terms that are no less favorable than those given to the dealer by Sharp You should be aware however that Sharp does not itself extend any warranties either express or implied directly to you the end user and no one is authorized to make any representations or warranties on behalf of Sharp Specifically SHARP DOES NOT EXTEND TO YOU THE END USER ANY EXPRESS WARRANTY OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR USE OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN CONNEC TION WITH THE HARDWARE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE EMBODIED IN OR USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THIS PR
65. please consult your authorized SHARP dealer O gt CHK 9 Optional keys Numeric keys Dept number key Direct price lookup keys Department keys Percent 1 thru 9 keys Discount 1 thru 9 keys Charge 1 thru 9 keys Cash 2 thru 5 keys Conversion 1 thru 4 keys Received on account 2 key Paid out 2 key Check 1 thru 9 keys Transfer out key Transfer in key Cash tip key Charge tip key P 1 5 g 23 Z oF ES El x lt al 0 4 DEPOSI EJ Oo E JU TO DM m lt m Z yo O Ny gt 00 EA U m m m 4 m FINAL 0 ao lt O O a gt lt mo m E e no gt 0 B E E 102 CAL m h OO wa EATINS SHIFT AUTO oon 99 GAS28 wef ORTL Tip paid key Eat in 1 thru 3 keys Tax 1 thru Tax 5 shift keys Deposit key Deposit refund key PLU level shift menu key Automatic sequencing 2 thru 99 keys Backspace key Delete key Service key Final key Tray subtotal key Return key Gasoline sales 1 thru 28 subtotal key Guest lookup key Scale entry key Se un Sel e8 C lt o 2m 0 O O UU g Z 4 0 N m Z 5 0O o lt n zo ES D 30 03 123 2 28 33 28 laa S BAL e PLU level shift 1 thru 5 keys P SHIFT 6 Price level shift 1 thru 6 keys as Group discount shift 1 thru 3 keys GDSC on 3 FUNC MENU30 Validation print key Bill print key Past
66. sale Up to 12 characters can be entered e DATA ENT JOB Use the numeric entry method Key data entry job number Capture job no 0 thru 99 When 0 is programmed data entry is inhibited 152 E Void Procedure Program each item as follows Select the desired void function e TEXT Use the character entry method from the list DIRECT VOID Description for the void function PAST VOID SBTL VOID Up to 12 characters can be entered e DATA ENT JOB Use the numeric entry method Key data entry job no Capture job no O thru 99 When 0 is programmed data entry is inhibited DIRECT VOID it TEXT DIRECT VOID DATA ENT JOBu 00 PREV PGM2 MIKE E Refund Procedure FUNCTION t 06 TIP 07 RA 08 PO 09 MANUAL TAX 10 TAX DELETE 11 NO SALE 12 VOID 13 REFUND Program each item as follows e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for the refund or return function Up to 12 characters can be entered e DATA ENT JOB Use the numeric entry method Key data entry job no Capture job no 0 thru 99 When 0 is programmed data entry is inhibited PGH2 MIKE 0001 12 17PM PREV PGM2 MIKE PREV PGM2 MIKE 153 E Return Procedure 09 MANUAL TAX 10 TAX DELETE 11 NO SALE 12 VOID 13 REFUND PGH2 MIKE REFUND 1 REFUND 2 RETURN 12 51PH RETURN TEXT DATA ENT J
67. subtotal of taxable 4 items will appear in the window and the caption TAX4 and the tax 4 amount will appear Taxable 5 subtotal Press the and keys in this order at any point during a transaction The sales subtotal of taxable 5 items will appear in the window and the caption TAX5 and the tax 5 amount will appear E Tax inclusive subtotal full subtotal You may press the key at any point during a transaction The sales subtotal including tax and the symbol SUBTOTAL will appear in the display E Tray subtotal You may press the key during a transaction in the REG The contents of the tray total itemizer which includes tax are printed and displayed E Eat in subtotal You may press an eat in key prior to entering a payment Your POS terminal will calculate a subtotal according to the programmed tax exemption status and display the subtotal the symbol EAT IN and a corresponding caption EAT IN 1 EAT IN 2 or EAT IN 3 will be displayed For a transaction with an eat in subtotal you must finalize the transaction by making a payment entry Just after pressing the eat in key however you can cancel the entry of that key by pressing the key or another eat in key E Food stamp eligible subtotal You may press the key at any point during a transaction The sale subtotal of items eligible for food stamp payment will appear in the display 51 E Group discountable subtotal Group 1 discountable subtot
68. the Function Menu Windows Your POS terminal allows you to select functions from specified function menu windows depending upon the terminal setup For example if you want to finalize a charge 2 sale select the option CHG 2 from the charge menu instead of pressing the key Each menu can be opened as follows 97 Miscellaneous function menu window e Conversion menu window FUNC CONV gt cn SERV 001 P1L1 4 48PH e Cash menu window e Massage menu window Eal HSG1 MSG2 CASH MSG3 MSG4 en none 01 MSG MENU 0001 SERV 0 e Check menu window e Void menu window Eg CHECK CHECK6 e gt CHECK2 CHECK7 Bay CHECKS E CHECK9 C SERV 001 CHECK MENU SERV 001 P1L1 4 51PM e Charge menu window e PLU menu window i PLU MENU50 SERV 001 PLUOO1 0001 SERV 001 CHARGE MENU Xo The keys on these menus are shown as examples You can set your choice of function keys on the function menu and PLU keys on the PLU menu 98 1 PLOO010 10 00 TAX 0 60 SBTL 10 60 PLOO010 HOME MENU 0001 10 00 P1L1 4 37PM 1 PLOO010 10 00 TAX 0 60 SBTL 10 604 PL00010 CHARGE MENU 10 00 P111 1 PLOO010 10 00 MDSE ST 10 00 TAX1 0 60 CHARGE 10 60 TAX 0 60 SBTL 10 60 MIKE CHARGE MENU UL Selling the PLU no 10 item and finalizing through charge 2 1 Press the key 2 Press the key e The charge CHECK menu window will appear i
69. the PLU has been assigned directly on the keyboard instead of selecting the key from the menu e When selecting a department the screen on which a department code is to be entered the message DEPT CODE will appear e When selecting a combo the screen on which a combo table number is to be entered COMBO TBL will appear LEVELS e LEVEL1 thru 5 Use the numeric entry method Enter a PLU number or combo table number for each level EUa TERTI For example if you want to use this key as PLU code 1 level 1 and PLU code 101 level 2 enter 1 for the LEVEL1 and 101 for the LEVEL2 140 Key numbers N J N S FT O z gt Q Y G D JI O U El Q JI gt mo EP PE D SE O pa 2 nr ala eo ee de tel SN yl 3 o OS J 2 ES IF O FI MN ES gt 4 Q 9 GS Y Gl GS Y C gt O gt O m G ES Y CH i MDSE SBTL 7 A O HO I Q P G D lt O U Q P JIJ TI 5 IJ 7 y gt O Q P TI sc 22 O Po PRICE J Q CHANGE Default keyboard Departments PLUs and combo meals programmable area You cannot place a department PLU or combo
70. the following procedure to cancel it If no item has been entered press the key If an item entry has been made perform a subtotal void operation 78 WASTE mode This mode is used to remove an article which has already been prepared and is no longer suitable to be served Procedure waste gt ltem entry WASTE mode e PLU entries are only allowed in the WASTE mode and direct and indirect void operations are also allowed in this mode e When a WASTE mode transaction is finalized the drawer does not open e The consecutive number is incremented every WASTE mode transaction e When the WASTE mode is activated by pressing the key the mode caption WASTE is displayed Key Operation Print z E WASTE PL00010 10 00 PLO0011 11 00 ma z E 79 Correction Correction of the Last Entry Direct Void REG MODE If you make an incorrect entry relating to a department PLU subdepartment UPC percentage La thru discount thru manual tax or tip you can immediately void the entry by pressing the key or touch ing VOID in the keyboard area of the display Procedure Key Operation 1250 5 Voiding a deportment entry a VOID Voiding a PLU entry VOID Voiding a UPC code 5012345678900 ruuec entry voio 600 a Voiding a percent calculation 328 3 Voiding a discount entry 28 Voiding a deportment entry prese price Voidi
71. void counter and total Hash item indirect void Hash item refund counter and total Hash item refund counter and total No sale exchange counter Guest check copy counter Bill print counter Till timer counter Tray subtotal print counter GLU PBLU counter Service counter for GLU PBLU Cover counter Transfer out counter and total Transfer in counter and total Transaction counter AVE SALE 34 68 NET3 5765 17 WASTE TL 70 29 50 CASH 1560 4666 14 CASH2 30 25 14 CASH3 10 40 95 CASH4 10 12 72 CASH 1Q 12 96 CASH TL 1620 4757 91 FS SALE 20 17 50 FS SALE EBT 10 10 00 Sales total including hash dept total Waste counter and total Cash counter and total Cash 2 counter and total Total for cash Food stamp sales total FS tendering by EBT sales total To be continued on the next page 91 SCH SCH SCH TIL HEERA RA TL xxP0 PO TL CAZCHK1 CA CK TL FS CG CONV 2 CONV 3 CONV 4 CONY TL FS ID CHARGE CHARGE2 CHARGE3 CHR TL CHECK CHECK2 CHECK3 CHECK4 CHECK9 CHECK TL CAtCH ID xxx DEPOSIT DPST RF TIP PAID CA TIP CH TIP 3360 00 2696 80 663 20 48 00 48 00 130 00 479 45 392 75 106 10 62 02 25 44 19 00 605 31 5872 92 5267 61 50 00 50 00 24 00 3 00 21 00 Starting cash memory Starting cash memory Starting cash memory total Received on account counter and to
72. your machine Otherwise it may cause a malfunction Install the paper roll in the printer Be careful to set the roll and cut the paper end correctly If the leading end of the paper roll is fixed with paste or tape the paper s color development ability may be lost in the pasted or taped area due to deterioration of the heat sensitive color development compo nent of the paper surface As a result nothing may be printed in this area Therefore when setting a new paper roll in the machine be sure to cut off approximately one revolution approx 25 cm long How to set the paper roll How to cut the paper end WY To the printer To the printer Incorrect Correct Correct Incorrect 265 E Installing a paper roll Installing the receipt paper roll Select the REG mode with the AC cord connected Remove the printer cover Check that the print head release lever is in its printing position Set the paper correctly as illustrated right in the paper roll location receipt side of the printer Insert the end of the paper into the paper chute as shown on the right It will automatically be fed through the printer Cut off the excess paper that comes out of the printer with the manual cutter 7 Replace the printer cover O Q WG N Printing position Manual cutter Installing a journal paper roll 1 Select the REG mode with the AC cord connected 2 Remove the printer cover
73. 0 Replace the printer cover Precautions Never touch the print head with a tool or anything hard which may damage the head 2 0 Removing the Till and the Drawer The till in the POS terminal is detachable After closing your business for the day remove the till from the drawer and keep the drawer open The 6 denomination coin case is also detachable from the till To detach the drawer pull it forward fully with the till removed and remove it by lifting it up Opening the Drawer by Hand The drawer automatically opens However when a power failure occurs or the machine becomes out of order slide the lever located on the bottom of the machine in the direction of the arrow See the diagram on the right The drawer will not open if it is locked with the key Before Calling for Service Phenomena shown in the left hand column of the table below do not always imply functional faults of the terminal Before calling for service please carry out checks as suggested in the Check column e The display does nat illuminate e Is power supplied to the electrical outlet e Is the AC power cord plug disconnected or loosely connected to the electrical outlet e Is the contrast control adjusted correctly e s the terminal in the screen save mode The display is illuminated but the e Is a server code assigned to the POS terminal whole machine rejects any entry e s the terminal set properly to the REG mode e
74. 00 247 75 XJOTAL 449 0290 Price level 1 an m m m e mie e e ae A e A e e rs UPC 5099887654302 TEN A 5 509988 7654303 ITEM B rae 909988 76543048 ITEM H 4 0000 eeKTOTAL 11 0120 Price level 1 0120 0000 E Cash in drawer report e Sample X report 12 06 2008 000001 1569 8 12AM 0131 X 1 CID Server code SRVHOOO 1 TRANS CT 400 NET3 1153 94 CID 1692 44 SAVROOOZ2 JACK TRANS CT 810 NET3 1730 28 x xxCID 1442 62 SUE Server name Transaction counter Sales total Cash in drawer TOTAL TRANS CT 1210 NET3 2884 22 xxxC ID 3135 06 E Positive check report e Sample X report 127 0672008 000001 1731 10 24PH JACKODO2 0139 X 1 POSITIVE CHECK A0000000000003030 CHARGE 0000000000006561 CHECK3 52 02 110 00 e Sample Z report 12 06 2008 000001 1829 11 23PM JACKO002 40139 Z1 POSITIVE CHECK A0000000000003030 CHARGE 62 02 110 00 0000000000006561 CHECKS 100 E DynamicUPC report by designated range e Sample X report 12 06 2008 000001 1783 10 45PM JACK0002 0169 X1 DYNAMIC UPC 00001 999999 1123456 789005 LTM 2 1 Q 15 85 NET SLS 15 85 100 00 ITN 2 6 22 40 NET SLS 22 40 100 00 sax TOTAL 15 85 HASTE TL l 100 00 E DynamicUPC pick up report e Sample X report 12 06 2008 000001 1799 10 59PM JACKO002 R01
75. 03 CHECK MENU 04 CHARGE MENU 05 CONV MENU 06 VOID MENU 07 MSG MENU 08 FUNCTION MENUOS PGH2 2 28PM The screen continues y FUNCTION MENUOS PGH2 FUNCTION MENUOS DER a 02 DEP Tu 03 INHIBIT 04 INHIBIT 05 INHIBIT 06 INHIBIT 07 INHIBIT 08 INHIBIT v NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 2 30PM The screen continues 01 lt 092 LEVEL gt 03 lt 098 PRICE SFT gt 04 lt 105 TAX1SF gt 05 lt 110 GD1SF T gt 06 lt 113 GDSCZ1 gt 07 lt 116 Y 1 gt The screen continues h H 01 x028 BACK SPACE x029 DELETE 030 MDS ST 031 TRY ST 032 GAS ST 033 t TM 034 NO SALE 035 SCALE PGH2 o The screen continues 1 Select the desired function menu key from the function menu key list 2 Select 1 SETTING 3 Select the desired function key number In this example the AMOUNT and DEPTH keys are allocated to the 01 and 02 of func key Some function menu keys have the specific function keys allocated to them by default For details of the preprogrammed function keys refer to Function menu key list 4 Select the desired function key group Selecting a function key group here allows you to jump to a function key listed close to your desired one 5 Select a function key which you like to assign to the function menu key 229 E Function menu key continued Setting a menu title Procedure FUNCTION ME
76. 08 206 E Zero skip You can program whether or not to skip 0 sales totalizer in each report Procedure 0 SKIP SERVER TRANSACTION SKIP DEPARTMENT SKIP PLU UPC SKIP HOURLY SKIP SCH SKIP DAILY NET SKIP PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE E Hourly report Program each item as follows e SERVER Use the selective entry method NOT SKIP Does not skip those data that are 0 sales in the server report SKIP Skips those data that are 0 sales in the server report e TRANSACTION Use the selective entry method NOT SKIP Does not skip those data that are 0 sales in the transaction report SKIP Skips those data that are 0 sales in the transaction report e DEPARTMENT Use the selective entry method NOT SKIP Does not skip those data that are 0 sales in the department report SKIP Skips those data that are 0 sales in the department report e PLU UPC Use the selective entry method NOT SKIP Does not skip those data that are 0 sales in the PLU UPC report SKIP Skips those data that are 0 sales in the PLU UPC report e HOURLY Use the selective entry method NOT SKIP Does not skip those data that are 0 sales in the hourly report SKIP Skips those data that are 0 sales in the hourly report e SCM Use the selective entry method NOT SKIP Does not skip those data that are 0 sales in the SCM report SKIP Skips those data that are
77. 21 58 Date Transaction counter Sales total e Sample Z report 000002 JACKO002 12 06 2008 2052 2 42PH 0270 Z2 DAILY NET DAILY NET Z2 0002 TOTAL 00 0 00 The subsequent printout occurs in the same format as in the sample X report Gi i E Customer sales report Customer details only report and customer sales all report are printed in the same format You can print either report depending on the programming of CUSTOMER DATA in FUNC SELECT2 menu On the customer details only report you can print details date sales item only On the customer sales all report you can print and reset in Z2 mode accumulated sales q ty total and details 0285 X2 CUSTOMER SALES 0000000000001 9999999999999 Code range 0000000035521 Customer code NAME 4194 Name ADDRESS 4194 Address 30 10 T Sales q ty and total CHARGE 25 20 Charge account 12 1 2 2008 Date 31123456 78905 AAAOOO 10 1 70 Sales items 12 13 2008 P00004 PLOO004 1 10 2 70 0000000065321 NAME 65321 ADDRESS 65321 57 52 CHARGE 0 00 12 12 2008 FP 00002 250 57 50 170 52 70 PLO0003 1 170 32 70 SUBTOTAL 60 261 i 8 Subtotal on the report CHARGE 89 38 TOTAL 60 261 28 The full total on the customer file CHARGE 89 38 When you take a Z report Z2 is printed instead of X2 E E E Customer sales report by sales range 0286 x2x When you take a Z report Z2 is
78. 6 CASH 260 1088 56 ma 20 45 57 CASH2 1Q 12 72 CHARGE T CASH3 10 40 95 CASH4 10 12 72 CASH5 10 12 96 CHARGE id 18 i CHARGES H CHARGE 4 20 40 26 CHARGES 10 i CHARGES 10 18 12 CHECK 30 162 50 CHECK 20 34 73 CHECK 30 65 05 CHECK2 20 30 18 CHECK3 60 260 20 CHECK3 10 29 16 CHECK4 40 120 65 CHECK4 10 25 44 CHECKS 30 162 39 CHECKS 10 19 00 one 21561 10 a eee y ota CA CH ID 1352 63 GROUP3 60 36 12 trex 1D 1168 91 GROUP4 00 0 00 GROUPS 00 0 00 GROUP6 00 0 00 GROUP 00 0 00 GROUPS 00 0 00 GROUPS When the tip amount remains unchanged in Individual Server Resetting the tip paid function is automatically executed and a tip receipt is printed on the report printer prior to report printing 104 Mi Full server report e Sample X report e Sample Z report 12 06 2008 000001 12 06 2008 000001 41574 8 14AM HIKEO001 1577 8 17AM MIKEOO01 0140 X1 20140 1Z1x ALL SERVER ALL SERVER SERVER 21 22 Reset counter The subsequent printout occurs in the same format as in the sample report shown in the Individual server report and sales data on servers print in this sequence E SCM Starting cash memory report 12 06 2008 000002 2060 4 29PM 0147 X1 SCM SRYROOO 1 SCH SCM SCM TTL SRVFOOO2 SCM SCM TTL SRVFOOOS SRVFOOO4 SRV FOOOS SRY FOOOG SRV OOO 7 SERV 007 SRVROO 13 SERV 013 SRVROO1 4 SERV 014 SRVFOO 15 SERV
79. 69 X1 DYNAMIC UPC 1123456 789005 ITH 2 1 NET SLS fa 1TH 2 6 NET SLS OT AL WASTE TL WASTE TL 100 00 If you need these information please consult your dealer e Sample Z report 12 06 2008 000001 1783 11 16PM JACK0002 0169 2 1 DYNAMIC UPC The subsequent printout occurs in the same format as in the sample X report eee ee E Dynamic UPC report by associated department e Sample X report e Sample Z report 12 06 2008 000001 1784 11 19PM JACK0002 12 06 2008 000001 1799 10 59PM JACKO002 ROTG6 X1 D UPC BY DEPT 0156 21 D UPC BY DEPT DPT O1 1123456789005 11M 2 1 The subsequent printout occurs NET SLS in the same format as in the sample X report ITH 2 6 NET SLS OT AL WASTE TL 100 00 If you need these information please consult your dealer 00 E Tax report 12 06 2008 1715 4 51PM 0133 X1 TAX 000001 MIKE0001 When the Canadian tax system is selected TAKI ST GRS TAXI 2568 73 158 41 4 26 154 15 Net taxable 1 total Gross tax 1 total Refund tax 1 total Net tax 1 total Taxable 1 exempt total Gross manual tax total Net manual tax total TTL TAX E Key capture report 12 06 2008 000001 JACKO002 1716 11 32PH 0179 X 1 KEY CAPTURE 01 12 06 2008 10 15PM 1628 CAPTUREO1 12345 HO2 12 06 2008 10 16PM 1629 CHARGES 123456 12 06 200
80. 7 Prevention O paper 19 0 Cs rezene a E en eee ene ee 268 FIEIMOMING a paper Me eno a a 269 Gleaning the Print A strdi arses cecetee tec cic dod et bee A els wide dete E eis 270 Removing the Till and the Drawet cccccccccssseececcceeeeecceecseaseeeeeseaesseeeeessaueasceeeeesaaseceeeesaaaaeeeesseseaneeeeeesaeas 271 Operating the Drawer DyN di e e tomo 271 e ls AAA a a Gale e nace eet aaa 272 16 ISU ODIONS cache soaker renee teeta ica Ran teeon ce a T E ees tacen seco 272 TL Spec ica ON eee al ele E 273 Part Names and Functions This chapter describes the part names and functions of this POS terminal External View E Front view Customer display Pop up type Printer cover Journal filter Operator display RS232 connector Keyboard normal type SD card slot Drawer Drawer lock E Rear view Printer The POS terminal UP 820N may be configured with multiple types of printers offered by the market For specific instructions related to the handling and care of the printer please refer to the applicable printer instruction manual The built in printer is a 2 station receipt journal type thermal printer and therefore it does not require any type of ink ribbon or cartridge The average life of the printer is approximately 5 million lines To open the printer cover lift up the cover as shown in the Illustration on the right Your POS terminal is shipped with the print head release lev
81. 8 10 16PM JACKO002 123456 ACKOO02 ACKO002 Tax total Capture job no Capture information TAXI ST GRS TAXI RED TAX TAXI Tax 1 TX1 EXPT TAX4 ST GRS TAX4 RFD TAX4 E TAX4 gt Tax 4 TX4 EXPT GRS MTAX RFD MTAX Manual tax M TAR 09 E t total f GST EXPT ro PST TIL GST TIL PST total GST total 103 E Individual server report e Sample X report e Sample Z report 12 06 2008 000001 12 06 2008 000001 1812 4 Z1PH JACKO002 1838 4 36PM MIKE0001 g aR H0141 Z1 ds ue Server code IND SERVER SRVHOOO3 SUE Server name NET 1 1403 64 Net sales total SERVER Z Me CA TIP 1Q 2 00 Cash tip in CH TIP 10 3 00 Charge tip in TIP PAID el 19 D0 rip paid counter The subsequent printout occurs AOS Al a Erica aes in the same format as in the NET3 1488 50 Cover counter sample X report CLOSE CK 00 0 00 Closed GLU PBLU counter and total OPEN CK 00 0 001 Open GLU PBLU counter and total TRAN OUT 00 0 001 Transfer out counter and total TRAN JN 00 0 00 Transfer in counter and total ERA 00 0 00 HRAZ 00 0 00 P0 00 0 00 PD2 00 0 00 REFUND 0Q 0 00 RETURN 00 0 00 GAS 19 DIR VO 00 0 00 DRW CNT 1460 PAST VD 00 0 00 CONV 1 30 00 1 40 4 00 CONV 2 40 00 Yon 20 3 90 CONV 3 35 00 23 10 24 CONV 4 33 00 da E e O GDISCZ1 30 2 10 GDISCZTL 30 2 70 CASH3 20 40 72 FS ID 25 00 CASH4 30 56 9
82. CODE Use the numeric entry method OPERATION MAINTE j Starting PLU code max 5 digits Enter a value or select an option for each item as follows e END CODE Use the numeric entry method Ending PLU code max 5 digits 9 me PESE DONA fx _ e OPERATION Use the selective entry method MAINTE Enables you to change the setting you have programmed NEW amp MAINTE Enables you to change the current setting when the specified codes have already been created or 8 to create new codes when the specified codes TOUCH KEY TEXT have not been created yet a or DELETE Enables you to delete a specified range of PLUs ENTRY TYPE BASE QTY PREV PGH2 MIKE The screen is continues in the same format as screens shown in section Hi PLU UPC 130 MW PLU UPC stock You can assign a stock quantity to each PLU UPC code Shown below is an example of selecting 1 OVER WRITE Procedure Select the desired PLU code from the PLUS list or directly enter a PLU UPC code 00001 CURRENT NEW STOCK PREV PGH2 MIKE After selecting 1 OVER WRITE select a pertinent PLU UPC code Then the next screen will appear to show the following items e CURRENT The current stock is displayed e NEW STOCK Use the numeric entry method Enter a new stock quantity max 7 digits 1 to 9999 999 e If you need to add or subtract a stock quantity to or from the current stock quantity select 2 ADD or 3 SUB
83. CTION KEY 21 CAPTURE KEY 22 CAPTURE JOB 23 TAX 24 TRAINING 7 in the SETTING window select 23 TAX e The TAX window will appear PGH2 2 Select any option from the following options list 1 TAX1 Tax 2 TAX2 Tax2 3 TAX3 Tax3 4 TAX4 Tax4 5 TAX5 Tax5 6 DOUGHNUT EXPT Doughnut exemption for the Canadian tax system e The option 6 DOUGHNUT EXPT appears only when the Canadian tax system is selected e If the key is pressed on the tax number selection menu the tax table or the tax in the cursor position will be deleted The following illustration shows the tax programming options 1 TAX1 See Table tax on page 236 or Rate tax on page 238 2 TAX2 See Table tax on page 236 or Rate tax on page 238 3 TAX3 See Table tax on page 236 or Rate tax on page 238 4 TAX4 See Table tax on page 236 or Rate tax on page 238 5 TAX5 See Table tax on page 236 or Rate tax on page 238 6 DOUGHNUT EXPT See Doughnut tax exemption on page 238 235 E Table tax Your POS terminal has an automatic tax calculation feature which allows you to program four tax tables Automatic tax calculations require you to program in addition to tax tables the tax status of each pertinent depart ment PLU and function key Sample tax table New Jersey tax table 6 Range of sales amount A Difference betw
84. D LIMITED SUBTOTAL VOID PUBLIC VOID MODE PUBLIC NO SALE PUBLIC PAY WHEN ST 0 ENABLE TIP PAID PUBLIC TRANS IN OUT PUBLIC INDIRECT VOTD GLU ENABLE OPEN GLU DISPLAY ENABLE UPC LEARNING ENABLE PRICE CHANGE PUBLIC CUSTOMER LEARNING ENABLE CUSTOMER TEL ENABLE FUNC SELECT ITEM VP ENABLE RF RT VP NON COMPULSORY VP NON COMPULSORY CA CHK VP NON COMPULSORY RA YP NON COMPULSORY PO YP NON COMPULSORY TIP VP NON COMPULSORY LEVEL SHIFT TYPE AUTO LEVEL SHIFT PUBLIC PRICE SHIFT TYPE AUTO PRICE SHIFT PUBLIC RETURN TO LEVELI BY ITEM RETURN TO PRICE BY ITEM FUNC SELECT2 SEAT INHIBIT COVER CT NON COMPULSORY TIP ENTRY AMOUNT SERVER DRAWER INHIBIT SHIFT KEY ACTION CAPS AUTO HOURLY ENABLE CONDIMENT CANCEL PUBLIC ISBN PRICE COMPULSORY CUSTOMER DATA DETAIL SERVER POPUP DISABLE T LOG FULL CONTINUE E J FULL LOCK CAPTURE FULL CONTINUE To be continued Report type Setting PURCHASE No TIME JOURNAL SELECT JOURNAL SIZE SMALL ITEM ON BILL NO SHARES YES REORDER KP MESSAGE YES CUSTOMER REPORT CHARGE BIRTHDAY YES TAR STATUS RJ NO TAX STATUS BILL NO TAX STATUS KP YES CUST CODERNAME KP NO CUST ADDRESS KP NO CUST TELEPHONER KP INTERVAL TIMER TILL TIMER SCREEN SAVE DRAWER ALARM DEFAULT MENU LEVEL DEFAULT MENU LEVEL AVAILABLE GLU START CODE END CODE BILL NUMBER BILL NUMBER BRIGHTNESS BRIGHTNESS 0 SKIP SERVER SKIP TRANSACTION SKIP DEPARTHENT SKIP PLU UPC SKIP HOURLY SCH
85. Disables header printing on the bill e FOOTER ON BILL Use the selective entry method YES Enables footer printing on the bill NO Disables footer printing on the bill e CLOSED GC Use the selective entry method RETAIN Retains the closed GLU PBLU summary data NO RETAIN Does not retain the closed GLU PBLU summary data e BILL PRINT Use the selective entry method Compulsory non compulsory bill printing COMPULSORY Compulsory bill printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory bill printing e FOOTER ON RCPT Use the selective entry method This item decides whether or not your POS terminal should print a message at the foot of a receipt when a specified cash key is used YES Enables footer printing on the receipt NO Disables footer printing on the receipt 156 E Cash keys continued e NON ADD Use the selective entry method You can enforce non add code entry when a cash entry is accepted COMPULSORY Compulsory non add code entry NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory non add code entry e NEGATIVE CHECK Use the selective entry method YES Enables the negative check function Any code non add code existing in the negative file is treated as invalid The negative check function can be overridden depending upon the programming NO Disables the negative check function e POSITIVE CHECK Use the selective entry method YES Enables the positive check function Any code non add code existing in the pos
86. E 16 CUSTOMER PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE in the SETTING window select 10 OPTIONAL The OPTIONAL window will appear OPTIONAL 1 FUNC PROHIBIT 2 FUNC SELECT1 3 FUNC SELECT2 4 PRINT SELECT 2 Select any option from the following options list 1 FUNC PROHIBIT Function prohibition 2 FUNC SELECT1 Function selection 1 3 FUNC SELECT2 Function selection 2 4 PRINT SELECT Printing selection NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGM2 MIKE The following illustration shows the optional feature options 1 FUNC PROHIBIT See Function prohibition on page 194 2 FUNC SELECT1 See Function selection 1 on page 196 3 FUNC SELECT2 See Function selection 2 on page 197 4 PRINT SELECT See Printing selection on page 199 193 WE Function prohibition Your POS terminal allows you to select whether to enable or disable various functions Procedure Program each item as follows FUNC PROHIBIT OPX Z REPORT e OPX Z REPORT Use the selective entry method dea e DISABLE Disables server report printing in the OP X Z mode peta a ae ENABLE Enables server report printing in the OP X Z mode S DIRECT VOID INDIRECT VOID e PAID OUT Use the selective entry method PREV MENT LIMITED Only available to the manager PGH2 MIKE PUBLIC Available to the manager and servers cashiers The screen continues e RFND SALES Use the selective entry method LIMITED O
87. E UPC or EAN code Your machine can handle the following codes e UPC A Number system character 0 2 3 4 e UPC E e EAN 8 e EAN 13 e Internal code EAN 8 EAN 13 For the purpose of in store marking there are two kinds of PLU type treated like PLU code and Non PLU type for price quantity information When a code is of the non PLU type the price quantity in the code is read for sales entries in case of quantity quantity multiplied by the preset unit price is processed to obtain the price UPC A e Number system character 0 lt used in the source marking gt fof fo ib i foi td db e Number system character 3 lt used as NDC or HRI gt H Maker code t Item code Number system character Check digit For entry a full 12 digit number or 11digit number omitting the ial i ti gt Et IA check digits must be entered NCD or HRI format _ J e Number system character 2 lt In store marking Non PLU type gt You can program the format in EAN NON PLU in ARTICLE setting e Number system character 4 lt In store marking PLU type gt Price check digit Here a full 12digit number 11digit number excluding the check k Free code digit or a leading zero plus 12 digit number must be entered Any number is allowed for the digits marked with and on the receipt journal non PLU type code is printed like 2020008 price information UPC E e UPC E is a ze
88. EFT COMPULSORY Compulsory EFT ACCT COMPULSORY Compulsory ACCT e EFT Use the selective entry method Select the ACTION CODE from the following options AUTH ONLY DIAL POST AUTH e EFT TYPE Use the selective entry method Select the transaction type GIFT CARD CHECK DEBIT CREDIT WE Service key continued e ACCT Use the selective entry method ONLINE COMPULSORY OFFLINE COMPULSORY CARD RD COMPULSORY e ACCT NEGATIVE Use the selective entry method NO YES e ACCT POSITIVE Use the selective entry method NO YES e CARD PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the card number NO Does not print the card number e SIGN LINE PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the signature line NO Does not print the signature line e CARD HOLDER PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the name of the card holder NO Does not print the name of the card holder e EXPIRATION PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the card expiration date NO Does not print the card expiration date e NUMBER OF RCPT Use the numeric entry method Number of authorization receipts to be issued 1 digit 1 to 9 If the number 0 is entered no authorization receipt is issued e PRINT LALO Use the numeric entry method LALO for gift card authorization receipt printing 00 00 99 99 e IC CARD Use the selective entry method YES Enables IC card entry NO Disables IC card en
89. ET SLS 4 0000 18 00 NET SLS P00008 PLOO008 15 0210 286 80 CP 1 0000 2 50 15 0210 21 0010 151 95 P00009 PLO0009 8 0020 89 55 NET SLS 8 0020 s10TAL 11 0120 96 25 WASTE TL 0 0000 0 00 RF IL 0 0000 CP 0 0000 0 00 NET TL 11 0120 96 E PLU UPC report by associated department e Sample X report e Sample Z report 12 06 2008 000001 12 06 2008 000001 A 1802 10 41AM JACK0002 1804 10 42AM JACK0002 0121 Z1 ALU RY eT PLU BY DEPT dept cose PLU BY DEPT 21 22 PLU code Item label 324 0040 land The subsequent printout occurs NET SLS P 00003 PLO0003 NET SLS P00004 PLO0004 CP NET SLS P00005 PL00005 CP NET SLS P00006 PLO0006 CP NET SLS P00007 PL00007 CP NET SLS P00008 PLO0008 CP NET SLS P00009 PLO0009 NET SLS 2 0000 322 0040 32 0090 2 0000 2 0000 30 0090 35 0020 3 0000 35 0020 40 0100 2 0000 40 0100 15 0030 1 0000 15 0030 21 0010 2 0000 21 0010 15 0210 1 0000 15 0210 8 0020 8 0020 106 20 2 50 103 70 4 94 152 95 00 amount for price level 1 in the same format as in the sample X report JOTAL 508 0660 COMBO TL 0 0000 WASTE TL 4 0000 RF TL 3 0000 CP 14 0000 NET TL 501 0660 2150 14 0 00 25 00 1 18 8 50 17 50 2099 14 100 00 A A AA UPC 909988 7654303 ITEM B 2 0000 NET
90. FP 00029 FP 00030 P0003 P 00032 FP 00033 P 00034 P 00035 PLUDO AUTO RETURN P00101 P00102 P00103 P00104 P00105 FP 00106 P00107 P00108 P00109 P00110 P00111 P00112 P00113 P00114 P00115 200 Title Menu PLU e Direct key PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 000001 41466 2 04PH MIKEOOO PGM2 DIRECT KEY Report type Key no 001 P00001 PLU code P00012 P00044 do p e op oy on SS Se 260 Data Clear The DATA CLEAR function is primarily used to clear data such as report data T LOG capture data transaction or hourly report daily net sales sign on GLU used flag offline account data or electronic journal file data in case some system trouble occurred occures This data clear function should be used only when your authorized SHARP dealer instructs you to do so Use the following procedure to perform data clear operation only when instructed by your authorized SHARP dealer Procedure PGHM2 MODE 4 OL READING 7 in the PGM2 mode menu select 5 DATA CLEAR arg The DATA CLEAR window will appear 04 D UPC LOAD 06 OPEN STORE 07 CLOSE STORE 08 KP READING PGH2 2 Select the data to be cleared DATA CLEAR 2 CAPTURE DATA 3 TRANSACTION 4 HOURLY 9 DAILY NET 6 SIGN ON FLAG 7 GLU USED FLAG 8 OFFLINE ACCT PGH2 The screen continues 261 Universal Product Code UPC or European Article Number EAN
91. Function key 8 Function key 9 Function key 10 to 15 MISC MENU RCPT ON OFF RA RA2 PO PO2 CA CHK1 CA CHK2 CA CHK3 CA CHK4 CA CHK5 CA CHK6 CA CHK7 CA CHK8 CA CHK9 NOSALE CASH MENU TL CASH2 CASH3 CASH4 CASH5 INHIBIT CHECK MENU CHECK CHECK2 CHECK3 CHECK4 CHECKS CHECK6 CHECK7 CHECK8 CHECK9 INHIBIT Function menu 04 key Menu title Function key 1 Function key 2 Function key 3 Function key 4 Function key 5 Function key 6 Function key 7 Function key 8 Function key 9 Function key 10 to 15 Function menu 05 key Menu title Function key 1 Function key 2 Function key 3 Function key 4 Function key 5 to 15 Function menu 06 key Menu title Function key 1 Function key 2 Function key 3 Function key 4 TO 15 Function menu 07 key Menu title Function key 1 Function key 2 Function key 3 Function key 4 Function key 5 Function key 6 Function key 7 TO 15 CHARGE MENU CHARGE1 CHARGE2 CHARGE3 CHARGE4 CHARGE5 CHARGE6 CHARGE7 CHARGES8 CHARGE9 INHIBIT CONV MENU CONV1 CONV2 CONV3 CONV4 INHIBIT VOID MENU VOID VOID ST VD INHIBIT MSG MENU MESSAGE1 MESSAGE2 MESSAGE3 MESSAGE4 MESSAGES MAIL MESSAGE INHIBIT Function menu 08 to 30 key fAs to IS Menu title Function key 1 TO 15 232 FUNC MENU INHIBIT Capture Key Programming Use the following procedure for capture key programming WE Capture key d
92. G REG mode X1Z1 X1 Z1 mode X2Z2 X2 Z2 mode e KEY 1 thru KEY 15 Use the selective entry method INHIBIT AUTO key is inhibited AUTO1 thru AUTO99 AUTO key no 22 Function Key Programming Use the following procedure for the function key programming Procedure SETTING 19 MACRO KEY 21 CAPTURE KEY 22 CAPTURE JOB 23 TAX 24 TRAINING 25 BACKUP SEND 26 BACKUP RECEIVE 7 in the SETTING window select 20 FUNCTION KEY e The FUNCTION KEY window will appear PGH2 2 Select an option from the following option list 1 FUNCTION MENU KEY Function menu key 2 FUNCTION KEY Function key FUNCTION KEY 1 FUNCTION MENU KEY 2 FUNCTION KEY PGH2 The following illustration shows the function key programming options 13 FUNCTION KEY 1 FUNCTION MENU KEY See Function menu key on page 229 2 FUNCTION KEY gt See Function key on page 231 See Function menu key list for the function keys assigned to each function menu key by default 228 E Function menu key You can assign a maximum of 15 function keys to each of the 30 function menu keys You can also program the display menu titles for each function menu key Pressing a function menu key displays its assigned function keys in the keyboard area allowing you to use those function keys by touching Setting a function menu key Procedure FUNCTION MENU KEY 4 02 CASH MENU
93. GROUP UPC PLU UPC group no PLU GROUP Full group total of PLU X1 X2 TOTAL UPC PLU STOCK PLU stock by designated X1 Z1 Start end PLU UPC codes range PLU STOCK PLU UPC stock pick up X1 PICK report SALES PLU UPC zero sales by X1 X2 Department code department PLU MINIMUM PLU UPC minimum stock X1 Start end PLU UPC codes STOCK PLU PRICE PLU UPC by price category X1 X2 Price CATEGORY lt DYNAMIC gt DYNAMIC UPC Dynamic UPC by designated range D UPC PICK Dynamic UPC pick up UP report D UPC BY Dynamic UPC by DEPT associated dept NON ACCESSED Non accessed UPC report UPC lt TRANSACTION gt X1 Z1 X2 Z2 Start end UPC codes X1 Z1 X2 Z2 1 KEY CAPTURE Key capture report X1 Z1 X2 Z2 Department code xi e x X X2 POSITIVE Positive check X1 Z1 CHECK a Z X Server code X1 All server data ID X TERR a O lt 2 88 TRANSACTION Transaction Pazi peze x x x x x Es Available report type Report title Description N ERG MOLE Data to be entered OPXZ X1 Z1 Rout yrange Pet E IEA MISA foy AU E oo Ceu u MU ESTI EEES GLU BY GLU by server X1 Z1 SERVER CLOSE GLU Closed GLU e e Start end GLU code CL GLU BY Closed GLU by server X1 Z1 SERVER CUSTOMER DETAILS Customer details only report X2 Start end customer codes ONLY REPORT CUSTOMER Customer sales all report X2 Z2 Start end customer codes SALES ALL REPORT CUSTOM BY Customer by designate
94. ICE Use the numeric entry method mix amp match gt ENER ae table number Unit price for each mix amp match table max 7 digits NOTE e If the key is pressed on the table number selection menu the table in the cursor position will be deleted MIKE Prog ramming examples For the examples on page 44 Example 1 for a certain PLU Example 2 for three PLU In addition to assignment of Mix and match table 01 In addition to assignment of Mix and match table 02 to PLU 39 proceed programming as follows to PLUs 40 41 and 42 proceed programming as follows MIX amp MATCH table no 1 MIX amp MATCH table no 2 TEXT PROMOTION TEXT VALUE SET BASE QTY 3 BASE QTY 3 PRICE 5 00 PRICE 6 90 135 E Combo meal table When two or more menu items consisting of PLUs related to a special offering are to be programmed together the combo meal function should be used Up to 20 combo keys tables can be programmed Each combo key can be associated with 9 PLUs items Procedure Program each item as follows e COMBO MEAL Use the numeric entry method Combo meal table number 1 thru 20 e Combo title Use the character entry method Title of each combo meal table max 16 characters PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE e KP TEXT Use the character entry method Description of the kitchen printer for a combo key Up to 12 characters can be entered e CONDIMENT TABLE Use the numeric entry met
95. ION vraiciacio letalidad tail iari 53 PIMAIZATOMLOL TRANSACTION siii ta illa cia iii 54 Cash or Che CTO o EE 54 Mixed tendering check cash criar eo deco dela 54 Cash or check sale that does not need any tender entry Expect payment ooocccccccccnccccnncccnnnncnnnnconnnnnons 54 Charge Credit Sala 54 Mixed tender sale cash or check tendering charge tendering coooccccnccccncoccnnnnccnonononnononnnncnnnnononnns 54 Positive Negative code checking function ccccccccconncnnncccnnoncnnnncnnononcnnnnnononencnnnnnonancnnnnnonnnnnnnnonnnnnncnnnnnnnnnns 54 Food stampe tendering sp tad 55 Food stamo Statis SM a a a celda 55 Tax G alculation S es e a a a ee eee a ee ere 56 PAU OIMANIG tax ssaa a aa NN 56 NAAT Ne ee a tee Sete scars a a a a tae soiace oe ne Ae eeesn Oee eens 56 Taca cis escrita pr O eee ee ere ee eee 57 Tax status SN aa a a a eee ee eet el eed 58 Guestcheck GLUP BELU cui ia a a ai is 59 GLUIPBLUES SM iia 59 DEPOSITO lt lado 61 Transferring guest checks out or in Transfer OUt in oocccccconncncoconnnnccnnnnononconcncnononnncnonnnnnnononnnnnenananonoss 62 lc An 63 cannnaiganeas a 65 AAA ee meee 67 ABE EMS et er o re ee al ld ee 68 Percent Calculations premium Or discount cccccoccnccccocnnnccnoncnnonononncnnnanononconcnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnannanennnnens 68 DISCOUNT ENNES cal osicido 69 REIR Mes a e O e ie 70 A UN MES ae 70 Printing of non add code NUMDCIS esposa da 71 Relund sales ModE ceai
96. LOO019 19 00 1 DPT OS 8 25 TAX 3 77 SBTL 66 57 DPT O4 VOID MENU 0001 v 13 10 PILI 4 30PH a 1 DPT OS 17 55 1 PLOO010 10 00 1 DPT OS 8 25 MDSE ST 35 80 TAX1 2 15 CASH 37 95 NOTE e To void entries that include a tax status shift des ar BL A VOID MENU 0001 press the E and or PiL1 4 33PM keys prior to touching I VOID 81 Subtotal Void With the SBTL VOID key or selecting a line and touching ST VD you can void an entire transaction Once a subtotal void is executed the transaction is canceled and the POS terminal issues a receipt Procedure Key Operation Display EE 1 DPT 03 13 10 1755 4 1 DPT O4 17 50 2 Xon 5 Puro 2 PL00005 10 00 10 euro 1 PL00010 10 00 SAT or TAX 3 04 SBTL 53 64 SUBTOTAL VOID MENU 553 64 P1L1 1 DPT OS3 13 10 1 DPT O4 17 50 2 PLO0005 10 00 1 PLOO010 10 00 MDSE ST 50 60 SBTL VOID 50 60 XXX TOTAL 0 00 TAX 0 00 SBTL 0 007 JACK VOID MENU PLEI 11 24AM Correction of Incorrect Entries Not Handled by the Direct or Indirect Void Function You cannot void any errors after finalization of a transaction or during entry of an amount tendered These errors must be handled by the manager The following steps should be taken 7 If you are entering an amount tendered finalize the transaction 2 Hand the incorrect receipt to your manager for recording purposes 89 Special Printing Functions P
97. Less than the programmed upper limit e Q ty x unit price Up to seven digits Key Operation 7 or 165 8 2 or 5 ee 200 enter 15 Pon JET 8 on La AT 18 1800 5 5099887654302 2 Select PLU code 20 from the menu 34 Print 10 20 2008 000002 2043 3 54PM SERV 0010001 7 1 65 DPT O8 DPT OS PL00008 PL00019 PLO0018 rar ES 54 00 5 1 00 5 00 2 20 00 PL00020 40 00 CASH 387 55 E Split pricing entries You will use this function when your customer wants to separately buy items normally sold in base unit quantities Procedure When you use a programmed unit price i i E Unit price E Senny diy FOR per ce q ty DEPT Unit price ENTER per base q ty ENTER or PLU code E Unit price p per base q ty Direct PLU _ Unit price PLU code Der basa q ty ENTER or a mv e en sin et thru Item selection ENTER gt Unit price ENTER UPC code PLU code Pruuro J pe pr ate or aM ow BB eno Era ra Only when you use a base q ty programmed for PLU or UPC code The pop up window for amount entry will open e After scanning a UPC code or entering a UPC code and pressing the key the learning UPC function may require you to enter a unit price with the display UNDEFINED CODE Enter the unit price and department code to be associated with the UPC e Selling quantity Up to four digits integer
98. MACRO KEY 20 FUNCTION KEY 21 CAPTURE KEY 23 TAX 24 TRAINING PGH2 CAPTURE JOBu a RES RESIS REESE A fei 1 56PM Select a pertinent fires macro key 01 MESSAGE 1 ENTRY 1 MAX LENGTH 1 MIN LENGTH 1 TEXT PRINT 1 MESSAGER2 ENTRY 2 MAX LENGTH 2 INHIBIT 13 LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 1 56pm The screen continues Program each item as follows e CAPTURE JOB Use the selective entry method Select the pertinent capture Job number 1 to 99 e MESSAGE Thru 4 Use the character entry method Description for the job display message Up to 12 characters can be entered for MESSAGE 1 Thru 4 e ENTRY 1 thru 4 Use the selective entry method Data entry type NUMERIC Numeric data type CHARACTER Character data type INHIBIT Data entry is inhibited e MAX LENGTH 1 thru 4 Use the numeric entry method Max length of data entry 0 to 13 0 means that ENTER key entry is only allowed e MIN LENGTH 1 thru 4 Use the numeric entry method Min length of data entry 0 to 13 e TEXT PRINT 1 thru 4 Use the selective entry method YES Prints entry data on R J or Bill printer NO Does not print entry data e If the key is pressed on the job number selection menu the selected job table will be deleted 234 Tax Programming Use the following procedure for tax programming Procedure SETTING tt 17 NEGATIVE 18 POSITIVE 19 MACRO KEY 20 FUN
99. NESS 6 BILL NUMBER LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE 1 In the SETTING window select 08 TERMINAL e The TERMINAL window will appear 2 Select any option from the following options list 1 MACHINE 2 CONSECUTIVE 3 INTERVAL TIMER 4 DEFAULT MENU 5 AVAILABLE GLU 6 BILL NUMBER 7 BRIGHTNESS Machine number Consecutive number Interval timer LEVEL Default menu level Available GLU code Bill number Brightness of the LCD display The following illustration shows those options included in the terminal programming group 1 MACHINE 8 TERMINAL 2 CONSECUTIVE 3 INTERVAL TIMER 4 DEFAULT MENU LEVEL 5 AVAILABLE GLU 6 BILL NUMBER 7 BRIGHTNESS See Machine number on page 190 See Consecutive number on page 190 See Interval timer on page 190 See Default menu level on page 191 See Available GLU code on page 191 See Bill number on page 191 See Brightness on page 191 189 E Machine number When your store has two or more POS terminals it is practical to assign unique machine numbers to them for identification Procedure MACHINE Program the item as follows MACHINE e MACHINE Use the numeric entry method Machine number max 6 digits O to 999999 PREV NEXT PGN2 MIKE 0001 10 46AM E Consecutive number The consecutive number is increased by one each time a receipt is issued Procedure CONSECUTIVE
100. NG 202 E System Z1 reports You can assign a secret code to each system report Secret code max 4 digits 0001 to 9999 0000 Use the numeric entry method Xo f O is entered the compulsory secret code entry will be canceled SYSTEM 21 DEPARTMENT 0000 Program each item as follows DYNAMIC UPC ter POSITIVE vie PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y hee 10 45AM me CON NiES E System PGM2 mode operations You can assign a secret code to each system programming operation in the PGM2 mode Secret code max 4 digits 0001 to 9999 0000 Use the numeric entry method Xo f 0 is entered the compulsory secret code entry will be canceled SYSTEM PGM2 DATA CLEAR 0000 Program each item as follows KP SETTING 0000 DATA CLEAR Data clear operation ONLINE SETTING 0000 KP SETTING Kitchen printer setting CYM SETTING 0000 EFT SETTING 0000 ONLINE SETTING Online setting ACCT SETTING 0000 CVM SETTING CVM setting e CE TING ate EFT SETTING EFT setting PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y ACCT SETTING Account setting PGM2 MIKE MWS SETTING Manager work station setting INLINE SETTING Inline setting 203 E Initial down loading with clearing of memory You can assign a secret code to each preset data to be downloaded Secret code max 4 digits 0001 to 9999 0000 Use the numeric entry method Xo F 0 is entered the compulsory secret code entry will be canceled
101. NTER O 11 Remum pLuupc N al O JNE lt 3 5J CHANGE 11 50 70 E Printing of non add code numbers Enter a non add code number with a maximum of 16 digits such as a customer reference number and press the key at any point during a transaction Key Operation Print 1230 7 11 18 2008 000001 o 1460 10 27PM JACKOOO2 a 1230 cy PL00005 5 00 PL00010 10 00 CHARGE 15 00 E Refund sales mode This function can be used only for item return entries relating to departments and PLUs UPCs Pressing the Eg key at the beginning of a transaction causes your POS terminal to enter the REFUND SALES mode All entries in the REFUND SALES mode are automatically treated as refund entries This mode cannot be finalized by a check payment entry E Group discount entries e Your POS terminal provides percent discount premium calculations for three groups e Percentage 0 01 to 100 00 Procedure To use the programmed rate so Group discountable subtotal XXX XX L w H a rate max 100 00 esc e Group discount status shift Your POS terminal allows you to shift the programmed group discount status of each dept PLU UPC 1 thru 9 percent by pressing the ES and or keys before that key After each entry is completed the pro grammed group discount status of the key is resumed 7j E Remote printer send function This function enables a partial order to
102. NU KEY t4 09 FUNCTION MENUOS 10 FUNCTION MENU10 11 FUNCTION MENU11 12 FUNCTION MENU12 13 FUNCTION MENU13 14 FUNCTION MENU14 15 FUNCTION MENU15 16 FUNCTION MENU16 PGH2 v FUNCTION MENUO9 sy 1 SETTING 2 MENU TITLE PEN GNESI PRESI A il y FUNCTION MENUOS MENU TITLE FUNCTION MENUOS RREME GEST EIST PADIMN We E 2 57m 1 Select the desired function menu key from the function menu key list 2 Select 2 MENU TITLE 3 Enter a text for the menu title e MENU TITLE Use the character entry method Text for the menu title Up to 16 characters can be entered Some function menu keys have the preprogrammed title texts corresponding to the function keys allocated to them by default For details of the preprogrammed function keys refer to Function menu key list 230 E Function key You can program a display key text and a display key color function key Procedure FUNCTION KEY PUP A 1 FUNCTION MENU KEY 2 FUNCTION KEY ERRUA IERE IST ADIN EN A RE The screen continues v 2 36PM 2 36PH The screen continues y 028 KEY TEXT BACK_SPACE FUNCTION KEY 01 lt 028 ALL FUNC KEY gt 02 lt 092 LEVEL gt 03 lt 098 PRICE SFT gt 04 lt 105 TAX1SF gt 05 lt 110 GD1SF T gt 06 lt 113 GDSCZ1 gt 07 lt 116 Y 1 gt 08 lt 125 1 gt PGN2 v 029 DELETE 030 MDS ST 031 TRY ST 032 GAS S
103. O FUNCION trio AA AAA eats saateasetal EE 84 9 Manager s Override Entries and Correction after Finalization oooccccccccccccocccononcconnnoncnonononanons 85 Overide Mere a 85 COrrechon anter FINAlIZANON e io 86 10 Reading X and Resetting Z of Sales Totals cocoooooccccocccccconcnnnnccononncnnonononononononononncnnonononononos 87 How to take an OPXZ X1 Z1 Or X2 Z2 reports cooccccccoccccccconncnnononnnncononnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonannnnnnnonens 87 Ao AA a a ea eee ee ee a ee 87 Daily Sales Total a a a ee Boe dad cok cate 90 Hans action e id 90 Deparimentre Dolar o 93 Individual group total report ON departments ccccccoonnnccccnconcccnnnncconnnnnnononnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnns 94 Full group total report on GSD AIMEOA Sii A A A e et 94 Department markdown report cocccocccnccccncnncconoconoccnnnncnonononnnnnnnnnnononnnnnn nn nnnnnnnnnnrnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnncoannanennnnens 94 PLU UPC report by designated range cccoooonnnnnccccnncccnncncononcnnnncononancnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnannnnnnnnnnns 95 PLUS GICK UD FEDORA rar i n 96 PLU UPC report by associated departMent ceros aa EA aaa i EAEAN 97 individual group total report on PLUSURES a da ii 98 Full group total reporton PLUSUPOS 30 e a E E ee eee 98 PLU UPC stock report by designated range ccccccccccccccnncccnnnoncnncnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnonnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnrninnnnns 98 PLUUPCG
104. OBt Program each item as follows e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for the return function Up to 12 characters can be entered e DATA ENT JOB Use the numeric entry method Key data entry job no Capture job no O thru 99 When 0 is programmed data entry is inhibited 154 Media Key Programming Use the following procedure for media key programming Procedure SETTING OF ARTICLE In the SETTING window select 05 MEDIA 03 PLU MENU KEY e The MEDIA window will appear 04 FUNCTION CT 06 TEXT 07 PERSONNEL 08 TERMINAL PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE MEDIA 2 Select any option from the following options list e ae 1 CASH Cash key 04 FS TEND 2 CHECK Check key E i 3 CHARGE Charge key 07 EAT IN 4 FS TEND Food stamp tender key ces a m m y OOUR 5 CASH BENEFIT Cash benefit key PGH2 MIKE 6 CONVERSION Currency conversion keys i 7 EAT IN Eat in key The screen continues 8 SERVICE Service key 9 FINAL Final key 10 CID Cash in drawer 11 CH CG Check change 12 CA CK Check cashing 13 MONEY Currency denominations The following illustration shows the media key programming options 1 CASH See Cash keys on page 156 2 CHECK See Check keys on page 160 3 CHARGE gt See Charge keys on page 163 4 FS TEND gt See Food stamp tender key on page 167 5 CASH BENEFIT gt See Cash benefit by EBT on page 171 6 CONVERSION gt See
105. ODUCT Sharp is not responsible for any damages or loss either direct incidental or consequential which you the end user may experience as a result of your purchase or use of the hardware software or firmware embodied in or used in conjunction with this product Your sole remedy in the event that you encounter any difficulties with the product is against the authorized dealer from which you purchased the product In the event that this authorized dealer does not honor its warranty commitments please contact the Retail Solutions Business Solutions Division Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd 335 Britannia Road East Mississauga Ontario L4Z 1W9 so that Sharp can try to help you to assure complete satisfaction of all the warranty rights to which you are entitled from the authorized dealer SHARP SHARP CORPORATION UP 820N_MIF10
106. OUP2 GROUPS GROUP4 GROUPS GROUP6 GROUP GROUPS GROUPS Text preset PLU GRO2 PLU GRO3 PLU GRO4 PLU GROS PLU GR97 PLU GR98 PLU GR99 PLU GR02 PLU GRO3 PLU GRO4 PLU GROS PLU GR9 PLU GR98 PLU GR99 Text preset 256 e Logo text PGM2 mode e Tax rate PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 000001 1454 2 01PM MIKEOOO1 12 06 2008 000001 1455 2 02PH HIKEGOOI PGM2 Report type Report type Tax no SHARP Rate PRESENTS THE r Receipt logo text Cycle BEST MACHINE Lower tax limit VP TEXT FOR DEPOSIT ONLY Breakpoint amount 1 O O O O O O 7 11 BILL LOGO 4 O000 gt HEADER Header text for O eae 12 bill printer 5 0000 O 20 ____ Doughnut tax exempt count FOOTER Footer text for bill printer Lower tax limit e AUTO key PGM2 mode HESSAGE TEXT 1 MESSAGE 1 2 MESSAGE 2 3 MESSAGE 3 4 MESSAGE 4 9 MESSAGE 5 SCROLL POLE DISP 12 06 2008 000001 1461 2 03PM MIKEOOO PGM2 AUTO KEY Report type O 1 AUTO key no Entry sequence programmed P00001 P0000 e GLU code PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 000001 1537 2 34PH PGM2 GLU CODE Report type GLU Start code End code e Macro key PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 000001 1462 2 03PH MIKE0001 2 PG MACRO KEY MACRO MACROR2 MACROS MACROHA e Function menu key PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 000001 1468 2 06PM MIKE0001 PGMZ FUNCTION MENU KEY MI
107. P Dept code DO1 39 0000 Sales q ty Sales amount Dept label 151 50 374 70 Group 1 sales q ty and amount E Full group total report on departments 12 06 2008 1656 1 13PM 0113 X1 DEPT GROUP TOTAL LP GR 1 56 0000 DPT GR 2 18 0000 PT G 2 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 1 0000 2 0000 2 0000 000001 JACK0002 Group 1 sales q ty and amount LO OO O ON a y Mo R R R R R R R R E Department markdown report 12 06 2008 1746 8 27AM H0119 Xx1x MARKDOWN DEPT 000001 MIKE0001 DO1 Dept code DPT O 1 1 TOTAL 1 TOTAL DO2 ee TOTAL 94 Dept label 1 counter and total item Item counter and total for dept 1 1 counter and total item Item counter and total for dept 1 E PLU UPC report by designated range e Sample X report e Sample Z report 12 06 2008 000001 12 06 2008 000001 1661 1 18PM JACK0002 1668 11 18PH JACK0002 0120 K 1 PLU UPC 0120 Z1 PLU code PLU UPC 00001 999999 PLU P00001 MILK Me 25 50 CP 1 0000 1 00 NET SLS 13 0040 24 50 P0000 pL00002 10 0040 CP 1 0000 1 00 10 040 PLO0003 20 0090 87 00 RF 2 0000 6 00 CP 2 0000 2 00 18 0090 79 00 18 0020 PLU range PLU UPC 21 22 Item label for price level1 level 1 i in the same format as in the Coupon counter and total for price lev
108. PC DELETE UPC record delete period 09 COMBO MEAL 10 SCALE TABLE 11 UPC NON PLU PREV PGH2 MIKE The following illustration shows the article programming option groups 1 DEPARTMENT gt See Department on page 125 2 PLU UPC gt See PLU UPC on page 127 3 DYNAMIC UPC gt See Dynamic UPC on page 130 4 PLU RANGE gt See PLU range on page 130 5 PLU STOCK gt See PLU UPC stock on page 131 6 LINK PLU TABLE gt See Link PLU table on page 132 7 CONDIMENT TABLE gt See Condiment table on page 133 8 MIX amp MATCH gt See Mix amp Match table on page 135 9 COMBO MEAL 10 SCALE TABLE 11 UPC NON PLU 12 UPC DELETE gt See Combo meal table on page 136 gt See Scale table on page 137 gt See UPC Non PLU code format on page 138 gt See UPC delete on page 139 ae ee E Department Your POS terminal machine is equipped with 10 standard departments and can be equipped with a maximum of 99 departments Use the following procedure to program for departments Select the desired dept code from the departments list SIGN DESCRIPTION DPT O2 ITEM VP NON COMPULSORY 0 E TARE No SCALE INHIBIT SIFZSICS NORMAL DEPT TYPE PREV PGH2 MIKE 02 ENTRY TYPE TAXABLE 1 TAXABLE 2 TAXABLE 3 TAXABLE 4 TAXABLE 5 FS CASH BNF GROUP DISCOUNT1 PREV PGH2 MIKE The screen continues Program each item as follows N
109. PGM2 MIKE NO Non taxable e FS CASH BNF Use the selective entry method Food stamp cash benefit status NO Food stamp cash benefit ineligible YES Food stamp cash benefit eligible FS CASH BNF e GROUP DISCOUNT 1 thru 3 Use the selective entry method GROUP DISCOUNTI GROUP DISCOUNT2 Group discount status Fep DISCOUNT3 rele NO Non discountable ENTRY TYPE YES Discountable ENTRY IN REG PREV NEXT olc HALO High Amount Lockout use the numeric entry method PGH2 MIKE A Significant digit for HALO 1 thru 9 B Number of zeros to follow the significant digit for HALO 0 thru 7 AB is the same as Ax 10B The screen continues e ENTRY TYPE Use the selective entry method ITEM Item SBTL Subtotal e ENTRY IN REG Use the selective entry method YES Allows a discount entry in the REG mode NO Inhibits a discount entry in the REG mode e DATA ENT JOB Use the numeric entry method Key data entry job number Capture job number O thru 99 When 0 is programmed data capture is inhibited e PLU1 thru 20 Use the numeric entry method Program the PLU code for which the corresponding key is usable 1 thru 99999 For the Markdown coupon entry item The coupon entry will be allowed only for a PLU which is listed in this table For the Discount coupon entry ST The coupon entry will be allowed only when all PLU listed in this table have been entered You can also select a
110. PLOO005 10 00 Jl as AM CA AT DE HDSE ST 13 00 10 00 7 1 1 30 CASH 11 70 Peacent calculation for item entries When a discount of 15 is preset for the key Key Operation Print 11 18 2008 o pos 2 1441 9 47PH JACKO002 a PL00006 6 00 15 00 ce 0 90 CASH 5 10 68 E Discount entries For discount or coupon tenderings you may use the thru keys if so programmed If the discount or tendered coupon is the one applicable to sales use the vendor coupon and if it is applicable to an item entry use the store coupon Ness Discount entries beyond the programmed limit for servers can be made by a manager e For a vendor coupon entry The coupon entry is allowed only when all PLUs associated with the key have been entered e For a store coupon entry The coupon entry is allowed only for a PLU which is associated with the key Discount for a merchandise subtotal Key Operation Print 11 18 2008 000001 30 1451 10 05PM JACKOOOZ Ed PL00007 7 00 ES PL00030 30 00 2 2 00 own NDSE ST 35 00 TAX 1 80 CASH 36 80 Discount for a merchandise subtotal Key Operation Print 11 18 2008 000001 1453 10 10PM JACKOOOZ PLOO007 7 00 1 PLO0007 0 50 50 or CA AT gms CASH 6 50 69 E Refund entries If a refunded item is to be entered into a department enter the amount of the refund then press the key a
111. Parameter Start customer code end customer code e 29 CHARGE ACCOUNT Charge account customer no payment report e 30 KEY CAPTURE Key capture report e 31 NON ACCESSED UPC No access UPC report e 32 NON ACCESSED CUST No access customer report 210 Logo Text Programming Use the following procedure for logo text programming Procedure SETTING tt 09 DATE TIME 10 OPTIONAL 11 SECRET CODE 12 REPORT 13 LOGO TEXT 14 DEVICE CONFIG 15 GLU CODE 16 CUSTOMER PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGM2 MIKE in the SETTING window select 13 LOGO TEXT e The LOGO TEXT window will appear 2 Select any option from the following options list LOGO TEXT 1 RECEIPT LOGO 2 VP TEXT 1 RECEIPT LOGO Receipt logo 3 BILL LOGO Jati a 4 SCROLL POLE DISP 2 VP TEXT Validation printing text 3 BILL LOGO Bill logo 4 SCROLL POLE DISP Scrolling message for pole display PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGN2 MIKE 0001 11 01AM The following illustration shows the logo text programming options 13 LOGO TEXT 1 RECEIPT LOGO See Receipt logo on page 212 2 VP TEXT See Validation printing text on page 212 3 BILL LOGO See Bill logo on page 213 4 SCROLL POLE DISP See Scrolling message for pole display on page 213 E E Receipt logo Your POS terminal can print programmed messages for customers on every receipt Procedure RECEIPT LOGO SHARP PRESENTS THE BEST
112. RTMENT Use the numeric entry method Full department report Parameter Start department code end department code 1 thru 99 e 02 DEPT IND GROUP Use the numeric entry method Individual group report on departments Parameter Department group no 1 thru 9 e 03 DEPT GROUP TOTAL Full group total report on departments e 04 MARKDOWN DEPT Use the numeric entry method Markdown for department report Parameter Start department code end department code 1 thru 50 e 05 PLU UPC Use the numeric entry method PLU report by designated range Parameter Start PLU code end PLU code 1 thru 999999 e 06 PLU BY DEPT Use the numeric entry method PLU report by associated departments Parameter Department code 1 thru 50 e 07 PLU IND GROUP Use the numeric entry method PLU report by individual group Parameter PLU group no 00 thru 99 e 08 PLU GROUP TOTAL Full group total report on PLUs e 09 PLU STOCK Use the numeric entry method PLU stock report Parameter Start PLU code end PLU code 1 thru 99999 e 10 PLU ZERO SALES Use the selective numeric entry method PLU zero sales report Parameter 1 ALL 2 BY DEPT When 2 BY DEPT is selected enter a department code 1 thru 99 e 11 PLU MINIMUM STOCK Use the numeric entry method PLU minimum stock report Parameter Start PLU code end PLU code 1 thru 99999 e 12 PLU PRICE CATEGORY Use the numeric entry method PLU price category report Parameter Start unit price end un
113. SC MENU RCP_ON OFF R CA CHK_9 NS CASH MENU CASH_TOTAL CA CA3 CA4 CAS INHIBIT INHIBIT INHIBIT INHIBIT INHIBIT e Capture key PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 000001 1463 2 04PM MIKEOO01 PGM2 CAPTURE KEY 1 ne 10 00 H2 CAPTUREO2 10 00 3 CAPTUREO3 10 00 H4 CAPTUREO4 10 00 5 CAPTUREOS 10 00 6 CAPTUREOG6 10 00 H7 A 8 CAPTUREO8 10 00 CAPTUREO9 10 00 CAPTURE10 10 00 e Capture job no PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 000001 1545 6 10PK M2 PG CAPTURE JOBR 01 4 0 13 00 1 HSG 11 0 13 00 1 258 e Device configuration PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 41465 2 04PM 000001 MIKEO0O1 M2 PG DEVICE CONFIG BUILT IN PRINTER 50 IMAGE FOOTER NOT PRINT JUURNAL PRINTER T 000 C 0 BUILT IN EXTERNAL JOURNAL nee RECEIPT PRINTER BILL PRINTER a REPORT PRINTER ert PRINT BUILT IN Report type Image mode Printer type VALIDATION VP KP 1 KPR2 EFT PIN PAD BCR SCANNER BERG BAR SCALE COIN DISPENSER ONLINE CVM DATA I F PREPAID CARD ONL ACCT BAL IC CARD POLE DISPLAY e PLU menu key PGM2 mode 000001 MIKE0001 12 06 2008 1469 2 15PM M2 PG PLU MENU KEY PLU menu 01 key no PLUOO1 AUTO RETURN P 00001 P00002 FP 00003 P 00004 FP 00005 FP 00006 P00007 FP 00008 FP 00009 FP 00010 P0001 P00012 P00013 P 00014 P 00015 PLUOO2 AUTO RETURN P00021 P00022 P00023 P00024 P00025 P00026 P00027 P 00028
114. SLS 2 0000 3099887654304 ITEM M 4 0000 4 0000 NET SLS xxx TOTAL WASTE TL 0 0000 RF TL 0 0000 CP 0 0000 NET TL 6 0000 6 0000 97 Total sales q ty and total sales amount for price level 1 Total sales q ty and total sales amount for price level 6 E Individual group report on PLUs UPCs E PLU UPC stock report by designated range 12 06 2008 000001 1803 10 41AM JACK0002 12 06 2008 000001 1798 10 394M 40122 X1 0124 X1 PLU TND GROUP PLU STOCK PLU code Range P0000 el 00001 Sales q ty and oni Te sit ew nto n price level 1 P00001 PLOOOO2 322 0040 650 00 mare MILK 43 0005 00003 P00002 PLU code PL00003 30 0090 114 85 a AA 00 stock q ty P00004 PLOO004 35 0020 145 00 P00005 PLOO00S 40 0100 247 75 Item label PLO0003 21 000S UPC 50998876543024 TEN A 9 0120 509988 7654303 ITEM B 2 0000 5099887654304 ITEM M 4 0000 PLU GRO 449 0290 UPC 909988 7654303 ITEM 8 4 000S Group 1 sales q ty and amount E Full group total report on PLUs UPCs E PLU UPC stock pick up report 12 06 2008 000001 12 06 2008 000001 111804 10 41AM 1818 9 40AM 0123 X 1 0124 X1 PLU GROUP TOTAL Item label PLU STOCK PLU GRO 449 0290 Sales q ty and PLU PLU GRO2 69 0350 00 amount for PLU P0001 rou PLO0001 43 000 PLU GRO3 0 0000 group 1 00007 PLO0002 16 0005 FP 00003 PLO0003 21 0005 PLU GRS 45 0370 371 10 PLU GR52 59 0270
115. Ss meee tee eee ee oe Pegg TE E eter ee eee re ce ne ero eer 137 UPC Non PEUsCOde TOMA ui e Ed 138 8 eg 0 Aa A A A A eee eee eee eer Rhee 139 Direct Key re LOOM eV IG 3 ios sctcteteye scranateaatin edeucaniatrsodadataleda acess eatenciotatisatiedotec a a aoadeandacesee 140 DirechPEU COMBO DE DIA Key ti idiotas 140 PLUME Key Program aia 142 A o A o E 142 FURCuUonal Program a A a 144 DISCOURE KEY AAN aii 145 Percent Key 7o FIU aia 146 Group discount key GDSC 1 thru GDSC 3 ii ecto ceendd nites Gases adi eae ee ese 146 Fas CISCOUNI orice txictaced ba sderecoscdentinzencencecies aoevae aamauarbecutcsdaseen sectetetiesccnueceraameencgncd cas aaleamseeteen ae tacaeeconeee 148 o Pe e A A aueean a eareneaes 149 A ne uae eaiteacse quads dees wes dain ns Bsenlab E ma ecoeh nore 149 A eetl es 150 A A E asbnadanarene a A 151 Manta id 151 Tac dele nl dls ets dde 152 A A ee eee ne eer eet cere neers 152 A tase tae teyaatet Aan retualadeacee oes olla ects noe austen da oenad tanta deatedonetdscaaemoemtcena se ceetebeleanae 153 A tneet EI EE TE E A TE E PPA E E PE T T T 153 A O 154 Media Key Froga mmng nat AR A A AA A enced naelctene es 155 A A tse sae deaie a lein es 156 ANA KY A ics cee acc te soe aa O A ctcen cuca a 160 OMA SRO S lc tipo 163 FOO SAM TENA dino 167 ESTEND EBT KEY rriet tddi a eE 169 Cash benefit EBT CASH BNF key eccccccccccccncncnccccccnnnnnnnnnononononcnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnos 171
116. T 011 Exempt tax 2 TX2 EXPT 053 Guest Check Copy Counter G C CNT 012 Net taxable 3 subtotal TAX3 ST 054 Drawer Counter DRW CNT 013 Gross tax 3 total GRS TAX3 055 Drawer Alarm DRAWER ALARM 014 Tax 3 total of refund entries RFD TAX3 056 Trans Out TRANS OUT 015 Net tax 3 total TAX3 057 Trans In TRANS IN 016 Exempt tax 3 TX3 EXPT 058 PBAL PBAL 017 Net taxable 4 subtotal TAX4 ST 059 Cover Count COVER CT 018 Gross tax 4 total GRS TAX4 060 Customer TRANS CT 019 Tax 4 total of refund entries RFD TAX4 061 Net3 Sales NETS 020 Net tax 4 total TAX4 062 Mash Net Total HASH TTL 021 Exempt tax 4 TX4 EXPT 063 Fs Change Cash FS CG 022 Net taxable 5 subtotal TAX5 ST 064 Cash Benefit Change Cash CBNF CG 023 Gross tax 5 total GRS TAX5 065 Cash Check In Drawer CA CH ID 024 Tax 5 total of refund entries RFD TAX5 066 Fs In Drawer FS ID 025 Net tax 5 total TAX5 067 Deposit DEPOSIT 026 Exempt tax 5 TAX5 EXPT 068 Deposit Refund DPST RF 027 Gross manual tax total GRS MTAX 069 Tip Paid TIP PAID 028 Refund manual tax total RFD MTAX 070 Dept Total DEPT TL 029 Exempt total from GST GST EXPT 071 Dept Total DEPT 030 PST total PST TTL 072 Hash Dpt Total HASH TL 031 GST total GST TTL 073 Hash Dpt Total HASH 032 Tax total TTL TAX 074 Bottle Dpt Total BTTL TL 033 Tax 1 forgiveness total FS TX1 075 Bottle Dpt Total BTTL 034 Tax 2 forgiveness total FS TX2 076 Gaso
117. T 033 TH 034 NO SALE 035 SCALE EWS BREST IIET RADIO m ORENSE EA HEISE PEDIA Q 2 37PM 1 In the FUNCTION KEY window select 2 FUNCTION KEY 2 Select a pertinent function key group Selecting a function key group here allows you to jump to a function key listed close to the desired one 3 Select the desired function key 4 Entera key text and press the key e KEY TEXT Use the character entry method Text for the function key Up to 12 characters can be entered By entry of the character _ the following text is displayed in the second line For the default texts of each function key refer to Default key text on the display 5 Select the desired key color from 232 colors p E Function menu key list For the function menu keys Ito no the default settings are as follows Function menu 01 key Menu title Function key 1 Function key 2 Function key 3 Function key 4 Function key 5 Function key 6 Function key 7 Function key 8 Function key 9 Function key 10 Function key 11 Function key 12 Function key 13 Function key 14 Function key 15 Function menu 02 key Menu title Function key 1 Function key 2 Function key 3 Function key 4 Function key 5 Function key 6 to 15 Function menu 03 key Menu title Function key 1 Function key 2 Function key 3 Function key 4 Function key 5 Function key 6 Function key 7
118. TMENT e The DEPARTMENT window will appear listing programmable departments 4 Select 01 DPT 01 to program for department 1 e The 01 window will appear 122 DESCRIPTION ITEM VP TARE No SCALE SIF SICS DEPT TYPE PREV PGH2 MIKE DESCRIPTION ITEM YP TARE No SCALE SIF SICS DEPT TYPE PREV PGM2 MIKE l PAGE DOWN j DPT O 1 NON COMPULSORY 0 INHIBIT NORMAL NORMAL 2 00 SOMEDEP TNANE NON COMPULSORY 0 INHIBIT NORMAL 01 ENTRY TYPE TAXABLE 1 TAXABLE 2 TAXABLE 3 TAXABLE 4 TAXABLE 5 FS CASH BNF GROUP DISCOUNT PREV PGH2 MIKE t ER th PU 4 OPEN amp PRESET 5 On the first page of the 01 window preset the unit price and de scription as follows There are three entry methods for the programming numeric entry character entry and selective entry e Move the cursor to or touch PRICE enter 200 by using numeric keys then press the key gt Numeric entry e Move the cursor to or touch DESCRIPTION enter SOMEDEPTNAME by using character keys then press the key Character entry If you want to clear the setting press the key before you press the key 6 Press the key and you will see the page as shown left then program the machine to set TAXABLE 2 as follows e Move the cursor to or touch TAXABLE 2 press the key to select YES then press the key gt Selective entry method T
119. UP See Department group text on page 185 3 PLU GROUP See PLU group text on page 185 4 SERVER GROUP See Server group text on page 186 5 MESSAGE TEXT See Message text on page 186 182 E Function text You can program a maximum of eight characters for each function by using the following table Procedure FUNCTION TEXT 002 TAX1 ST 003 GRS TAX1 004 RFD TAX1 005 TAX1 006 TX1 EXPT 007 TAX2 ST 008 GRS TAX2 PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE The screen continues de Function Default text ia Function Default text 001 Net sales total NET1 043 Mix amp Match Discount DISCOUNT 002 Net taxable 1 subtotal TAX1 ST 044 Manager Void MGR VD 003 Gross tax 1 total GRS TAX1 045 VOID MODE VOID 004 Tax 1 total of refund entries RFD TAX1 046 Hash Direct Void HASH VD 005 Net tax 1 total TAX1 047 Hash Past Void HASH P VD 006 Exempt tax 1 TX1 EXPT 048 Hash Refund HASH RF 007 Net taxable 2 subtotal TAX2 ST 049 Hash Return HASH RT 008 Gross tax 2 total GRS TAX2 050 Vp Counter VP CNT 009 Tax 2 total of refund entries RFD TAX2 051 Bill Counter BILL CNT 010 Net tax 2 total TAX2 052 Tray Counter TRAY CN
120. UP mae Numeric entry Scanning UPC code PLU UPC is displayed Q ty onl 69 a UPC code gt PLU code gt Direct PLU key 2 3 MGR mode Unit price gt eu 1 Press the keys to cancel the view mode 2 Press the key to register the displayed unit price of the PLU UPC item 3 The manager can change the unit price temporarily The unit price programmed in the PGM mode can not be changed The manager need to enter his or her manager code and secret code before the manager s opera tion NUS For repeat entry use the feu key 44 E UPC price change function To use this function consult your dealer The manager and servers cashiers can use this function when they need to change the unit price or associated department of a UPC item There are two methods for change 1 Price change mode You can change the preset price and or the associated department of a UPC item without entering the PGM mode 2 Changing price during a transaction When you have found an incorrect UPC price and or associated department upon transaction you can correct them during the transaction Upon entry of new price and or associated department the preset price and or associated department is automatically changed to the new price and or associated department For Non PLU type prices embedded in UPC A codes and press codes the prices in the codes have priority over the preset prices So for these codes a change
121. Use character keys Selective entry Press the key to toggle options and press the key to select it or press the key to show the options list Use the cursor keys to move the cursor and press the key to select it or touch the option on the screen 121 E Programming example The following example shows how to preset 2 00 for the unit price ABCDE for the description and taxable 2 yes for department Procedure 01 READING 03 AUTO KEY 04 D UPC LOAD 05 DATA CLEAR 06 OPEN STORE 07 CLOSE STORE 08 KP READING PREV PGM2 MIKE SETTING 02 DIRECT KEY 03 PLU MENU KEY 04 FUNCTION 05 MEDIA 06 TEXT 07 PERSONNEL 08 TERMINAL PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE ARTICLE 01 DEPARTMENT 02 PLU UPC 03 DYNAMIC UPC 04 PLU RANGE 05 PLU STOCK 06 LINK PLU TABLE 07 CONDIMENT TABLE 08 MIX amp MATCH PREV PGH2 MIKE 7 in the PGM2 MODE window select 02 SETTING by using the or key and press the key The SETTING screen will appear e You can also select 2 SETTING by using numeric key 2 then pressing the key or touching 2 SETTING on the screen e To return to the previous screen press the key 2 Select 01 ARTICLE The ARTICLE window will appear The arrow mark in the window shows that the window contains more options than are now on the screen To scroll the window press the key To return to the previous page press the key 3 Select 01 DEPAR
122. Use the selective entry method YES Enables footer printing on the bill NO Disables footer printing on the bill e CLOSED GC Use the selective entry method RETAIN Retains the closed GLU PBLU summary data NO RETAIN Does not retain the closed GLU PBLU summary data e BILL PRINT Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Compulsory bill printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory bill printing e FOOTER ON RCPT Use the selective entry method YES Enables footer printing on the receipt NO Disables footer printing on the receipt e NON ADD Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Compulsory non add code entry NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory non add code entry e NEGATIVE CHECK Use the selective entry method YES Enables the negative check function Any code non add code existing in the negative file is treated as invalid The negative check function can be overridden depending upon the programming NO Disables the negative check function 160 E Check keys continued e POSITIVE Use the selective entry method YES Enables the positive check function Any code non add code existing in the positive file is treated as valid NO Disables the positive check function e CHANGE DUE Use the selective entry method Whether to enable or disable the change calculation function can be selected for each check key DISABLE Disables change calculation ENABLE Enables change calculati
123. WN Y PGH2 MIKE E BCR SCANNER Procedure BCR SCANNER BAUD RATE DATA BITS PARITY STOP BIT PGH2 Program each item as follows e PRINTER Use the selective entry method Select the printer to be used EPSON TM T88 3 88 4 EPSON TM U 220 230 EPSON TM T90 BUILT IN built in printer e AUTO CUTTER Use the selective entry method Auto cutter function YES Enables auto cutter function NO Disables auto cutter function e LOGO TEXT Use the selective entry method Select the logo text printing status NOT PRINT Logo text is not printed PRINT Logo text is printed e TOP EXTRA LINE Use the numeric entry method Number of leading blank lines to be fed for a remote printer 0 to 9 e BOTTOM EXTRA LINE Use the numeric entry method Number of tracking blank lines to be fed for a remote printer 0 to 9 Program each item as follows e BAUD RATE Use the selective entry method Transmission speed baud rate 19200 bps 9600 bps 4800 bps e DATA BITS Use the selective entry method Data bit 7 bits 8 bits e PARITY Use the selective entry method Parity bit NON ODD EVEN e STOP BIT Use the selective entry method Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits 218 E Pole display POLE DISPLAY WAITING TIME Program the item as follows e WAITING TIME Use the numeric entry method Waiting time until the message is displayed on the pole display 1 to 999 When you enter 0 no message is displayed
124. _ 000001 1805 10 36PM JACK0002 12 06 2008 000001 1791 11 26PM JACK0002 0181 K1 GLU BY SERVER GLU BY SERVER Server code SRVFOOO Server name GLU 21 Table PBLU code Cover counter XPBAL Balance amount 0181 Z1 The subsequent printout occurs in the same format as in the bi GLU sample X report COVER CT exPBAL e TOTAL COVER CT 9 PBAL 196 75 07 MW Closed GLU PBLU report e Sample X report e Sample Z report 12 06 2008 000001 1792 11 27PH JACKO002 12 06 2008 000001 1810 10 39PM JACKO002 0182 K 1 CLOSED GLU 0182 Z1 CLOSED GLU Bill no 0001 9999 Bill range GLU YA 0001 Server code TBL H1 Table COVER CT Cover counter CHARGE 1 Amount The subsequent printout occurs Tip amount by tip edit in the same format as in the Final balance amount sample X report FIN BAL T OTAL Total 0 00 FIN BAL 503 86 108 E Closed GLU PBLU report by server e Sample X report 12 06 2008 000001 e Sample Z report 12 06 2008 000001 1814 10 39PM JACKO002 1794 11 27PM JACK0002 0183 K 1 0183 Z1 CL GLU BY SERVER CL GLU BY SERVER Server code SRVREOOO2 Server name GLU 2 Bill no Table Cover counter Amoun The subsequent printout occurs Tip amount by tip edit in the same format as in the Final balance amount sample X report CHARGE FIN BAL e TOTAL 1 94 85 00 85 00 96 23 Total 70 77 116
125. a ld ee 222 C stomer Progr MIMI stas cios 222 Negative Code File Programming ccccccccccccnccncnncnnnnnnccnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnanenins 223 Negative code OVemid Stats aere T E S 223 HINA AA a a a el ee ede 225 A E o a A E R 225 Macro Key FiogrammiNg kasirna EE EEE E A a 227 Mode POSITON AUTO KEY NO asii 227 FUNCTION Menu Key Programm sica ii aliado ariel dde iN 228 FUNCION MENDU KOY o Ri 229 FUNCIONE sra anne a a S 231 FUNCIONA Menu key loisir eeo e elsa aa a A TE ia 232 Capture Key Programming sesen a ANR 233 Capture KEY dataran aa a a a a a N le Lew a cele cane 233 Key Data Entry Job Table Programming cccscssssecccecccssseeeecceccsseeeceecccaseeceeececsssaeeeeescaseeeeeescacseeessssoeaees 234 Capture JOD RUN ut a liada 234 EA A She st dates a a a a a oahotake 235 A A ae eee 236 o eai a pone Ses etieauctic os ceiteteetiaGdieasscatieg E oflscense 238 Doughnut tax exemption for the Canadian tax system oonccccccccoconcnnncconononnnnnnnonancnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 238 TRAINING Mode Selec airis ct gents benz gece ot ia E OO 239 TRAINING MOS cr ie et ie et ee cea ate aa eee ee ee ae ey 239 Backup Data Send Programming A a E Cece eee 240 Backup Cal ass CM sd 240 Backup Data Receive Programming ness alas 241 BACKUP dIa TECON AAA e e E P An 241 PLY Updating inthe P GM MOGE unctiscacina di tito 242 Automatic Sequencing Key Programming ccccccccc
126. ach condiment table 133 Procedure PGH2 01 TEXT Selected condiment table gt EMER number MIKE REPEAT TIMES NEXT TABLE PLU 01 PLU 02 PLU 03 PLU 04 PLU 05 PGH2 00000 00000 00000 00000 00000 MIKE m The screen continues Program each item as follows e CONDIMENT TABLE Use the numeric entry method Condiment table number 1 thru 99 e REPEAT TIMES Use the numeric entry method Repeat times 1 thru 9 When the REPEAT TIMES 2 thru 9 is programmed the table is shown repeatedly as many times as programmed then the next table will be shown e NEXT TABLE Use the numeric entry method Enter the next condiment table number max 2 digits e PLU 1 28 Use the numeric key Select condiment PLUs contained in the table max 28 PLUs from the list e The description of the first PLU is used as the display prompt e PLU codes should be defined before programming a condiment table e If the key is pressed on the table number selection menu the table in the cursor position will be deleted 134 E Mix 8 Match table Procedure Program each item as follows e MIX amp MATCH Use the numeric entry method Mix 8 match table number 1 thru 99 e TEXT Use the character entry method PREV Description for the promotion Mix and match PGH2 MIKE e BASE QTY Use the numeric entry method Base quantity for each mix amp match table max 2 digits Selected PR
127. acter entry method Description for the check key Up to 12 characters can be entered e GLU PBLU Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Makes GLU PBLU entry compulsory INHIBIT Inhibits GLU PBLU entry ENABLE Enables GLU PBLU entry e HEADER ON BILL Use the selective entry method YES Enables header printing on the bill NO Disables header printing on the bill e FOOTER ON BILL Use the selective entry method YES Enables footer printing on the bill NO Disables footer printing on the bill e CLOSED GC Use the selective entry method RETAIN Retains the closed GLU PBLU summary data NO RETAIN Does not retain the closed GLU PBLU summary data e BILL PRINT Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Compulsory bill printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory bill printing e FOOTER ON RCPT Use the selective entry method YES Enables footer printing on the receipt NO Disables footer printing on the receipt e NON ADD Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Compulsory non add code entry NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory non add code entry e NEGATIVE CHECK Use the selective entry method YES Enables the negative check function Any code non add code existing in the negative file is treated as invalid The negative check function can be overridden depending upon the programming NO Disables the negative check function e POSITIVE Use the selective entry method YES Enables the positive
128. al You may press the En GD1 SHIFT and ser keys in this order at any point during a transaction Group 2 discountable subtotal You may press the FA GD2 SHIFT and ser keys in this order at any point during a transaction Group 3 discountable subtotal You may press the Fa GD3 SHIFT and ser keys in this order at any point during a transaction E Gasoline discount subtotal You may press the key and select the payment media at any point during a transaction The gasoline discount subtotal will appear in the display 529 Holding Recalling of Transaction E Hold Recall Function This function can be used during entry of a transaction to start entry of the next transaction For example if it seems to take time for a guest to make payment by pressing the HOLD RECALL key or touching HOLD RECALL in the keyboard area of the display you can start entry of a transaction with the next guest While the former transaction is held the red mark HOLD appears in the top left corner of the display indicating that the transaction is held You can resume the transaction with the former guest by pressing or touching the key again RECALL If you like to use this function consult your authorized SHARP dealer Procedure Key Operation Display For one guest For the next guest 1 PL00004 4 00 1 PL00005 5 00 TAX 0 54 SBTL 9 54 AA 3 PL00005 HOME MENU 0002 eta a 5 00 PILI 1 46PH Finalization y cnn
129. al file e Reporting X report The POS terminal reports the journal data same as normal journal formats in the electronic journal file by the report printer or the display Operation Select the reading operation E JOURNAL in the X1 Z1 mode It is possible to designate the range or code as follows C C No Consecutive no ALL or RANGE designate start no end no DATE Date ALL or RANGE designate start date end date TIME Time ALL or RANGE designate start time end time SERVER Server Cashier code ALL or INDIVIDUAL designate server cashier code e Resetting Z report It is possible to take the resetting report of the journal data in the electronic journal file by the report printer Operation Select the resetting operation E JOURNAL in X1 Z1 or OPXZ mode It is possible to designate the range consecutive no date time or server cashier code as shown in the Reporting X report paragraph can not be used j Non accessed UPC Dynamic UPC and Customer Code Deletion You can delete UPCs and customer codes that have not been accessed for a certain period You can program this period in the PGM2 mode As for customer codes you can delete any customer code with regardless of the non accessed period Follow the procedure below Non accessed UPC deletion 1 Enter the X1 Z1 mode from the mode selection window 2 Select 2 RESETTING 3 Select 8 NON ACCESSED UPC to delete non accessed UPCs
130. al size letters on the journal SMALL Prints compressed size letters on the journal e ITEM ON BILL Use the selective entry method NO Does not print items in a GLU PBLU transaction on the bill printer YES Prints items in a GLU PBLU transaction on the bill printer e SHARE Use the selective entry method NO Does not print the share percent in the department report YES Prints the share percent in the department report e REORDER KP MESSAGE Use the selective entry method YES Prints the reorder message on a kitchen printer NO Does not print the reorder message on a kitchen printer e CUSTOMER REPORT Use the selective entry method Non payment customer report format DETAIL Detail data CHARGE Charge amount data e BIRTHDAY Use the selective entry method YES Prints the entered birthday NO Does not print entered birthday e TAX STATUS RJ Use the selective entry method Taxable status printing on the receipt and journal YES NO e TAX STATUS BILL Use the selective entry method Taxable status printing on bill slip YES NO e TAX STATUS KP Use the selective entry method Taxable status printing on a kitchen printer YES NO 199 E Printing selection continued e CUST CODE amp NAME KP Use the selective entry method YES Prints the customer code and name on a kitchen printer bill slip NO Does not print the customer code and name on a kitchen printer e CUST ADDRESS KP Use the se
131. ales entries e A 1 bill is added to a 2 bill A maximum of 5 bills may be added to a 2 bill e The GLU PBLU code of 1 must be in use If the guest check s of 1 or 2 has already been handled by another server the guest check s must have been transferred out by the Transfer out operation e After the bill totalizing operation the individual payment function is not allowed Display BT TBL 103 Fy 102 102 au PBAL 0 00 1 PL00006 6 00 103 Iset 103 KPBAL 0 00 SERV Ele PE TAX 0 84 SBTL 14 841 ENTER SRYC FUNCTION MENU14 0002 P1L1 3 27PM 63 Bill transfer This function is used to change the GLU PBLU code of a particular bill Procedure 8 1 gt GLU PBLU code aLu New GLU PBLU code sar Kym e This function requires that the current GLU PBLU code be entered for 1 and a new GLU PBLU code 1 bill be entered for 2 e A 1 bill is transferred to a 2 bill The 1 bill is then cleared Key Operation 101 102 ar EN SBTL SERV 2 bill 64 SRVC FINAL Sales entries Payment operations Display TBL 102 101 XXPBAL 0 00 1 PL00004 4 00 1 PL00005 5 00 1102 XXPBAL 0 00 TAX 0 54 SBTL 9 54 ENTER SRYC FUNCTION MENU14 0002 3 30PM P1L1 E Bill separating The function is used when each guest of a group pays his or her own order With this function you can select some
132. ata You can program max 10 data capture keys for the capture data function Procedure SETTING H PU 4 17 NEGATIVE 18 POSITIVES 19 MACRO KEY 20 FUNCTION KEY 22 CAPTURE JOB 23 TAX 24 TRAINING PGH2 1 53PH 1 54PM CAPTURE KEY 02 CAPTUREO2 03 CAPTUREO3 04 CAPTUREO4 05 CAPTUREO5 06 CAPTUREO6 07 CAPTUREO 08 CAPTUREOS PGH2 Select the desired macro key EN a CAP 1 A TEXT CAP TUREO1 TEXT PRINT ENTRY COMPUL LINK JOB Program the item as follows e CAPTUREO1 thru 10 Use the selective entry method Select the desired data capture key from the list e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for the data capture key Up to 12 characters can be entered e TEXT PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the data capture key TEXT on R J or bill NO Does not print the data capture key TEXT e ENTRY COMPUL Use the selective entry method Enforcing the data capture key BEGIN Enforced at the beginning of transaction END Enforced at the end of transaction NO Not enforced assigned key data function no e LINK JOB Use the numeric entry method Capture job number 1 to 99 233 Key Data Entry Job Table Programming Use the following procedure for key data entry job table programming E Capture job number You can program a max of 99 capture job numbers 1 56PH Procedure SETTING H PUP E 17 NEGATIVE S 18 POSITIVE 19
133. ate AMOUNT Manual tip entry The screen continues e SERVER DRAWER Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Compulsory server drawer assignment at sign on INHIBIT Inhibits server drawer assignment at sign on e SHIFT KEY ACTION Use the selective entry method CAPS Locks the upper case letter mode once the shift key is pressed SHIFT Shifts the upper case letter mode to the lower case letter mode after an letter is entered e AUTO HOURLY Use the selective entry method DISABLE Disables automatic hourly reporting ENABLE Enables automatic hourly reporting If ENABLE is selected an hourly report is issued at hourly intervals automatically e CONDIMENT CANCEL Use the selective entry method LIMITED Cancel operation is only available to the manager PUBLIC Cancel operation is available to the manager and servers cashiers e ISBN PRICE Use the selective entry method Price entry after ISBN ISSN code entry INHIBIT COMPULSORY COMPULSORY Compulsory price entry after ISBN ISSN code entry INHIBIT Inhibits price entry after ISBN ISSN code entry e CUSTOMER DATA Use the selective entry method TOTAL Sales total and charge sales total DETAIL Detail data Sales total charge sales total sales date item s name amount and quantity e SERVER POPUP Use the selective entry method DISABLE Opens the SERVER POPUP sign on window upon 1st item entry ENABLE Does not open the SERVER POPUP sign on window upon 1st ite
134. be sent to the kitchen for preparation while the server is waiting for an order for other items Procedure Item entry gt Data transfer to the remote printer Remaining items will be sent to the remote printer when the transaction Is finalized When this function is used subtotal void operation is not allowed E Gratuity If the gratuity function is enabled you can easily add a gratuity as programmed to the subtotal by pressing the key before finalization of the transaction When the transaction is subject to gratuity the gratuity symbol G appears on the display screen To cancel the gratuity function press the key again Key Operation Display TBL 1 KPBAL 0 00 1 PLO0009 9 00 1 PLO0010 10 00 JOME TAX 1 26 SBTL 22 16 PL00010 HOME MENU 10 00 PILI CH TBL t 1 PL00010 10 00 cea BAL FWD 19 00 MDSE ST 19 00 GRATUITY 1 90 TAXI 1 26 CHARGE2 22 16 BALANCE 0 00 CHECK CLOSE 11 06AM e You cannot add a gratuity during a payment operation e You can also make food stamp tendering operation after pressing the key though tax exemption is not allowed e If you combine a guest check subject to gratuity and one s not subject to gratuity by the Bill Totalizing function a gratuity will be charged to the subtotal of the combined guest check the gratuity amount 2 Payment Treatment E Tip in entries Your POS terminal allows the entry of tips given
135. bject PLU should not be programmed as a minus PLU or belong OUTPUT KP No 2 to any minus department OUTPUT KP No 3 CHIT RECEIPT CUM CTRL CHAR e MENU TYPE Use the selective entry method REPEAT ROUND DOUGHNUT EXEMPT PLU menu type selection DATA ERT MBA T NORMAL Normal PLU UPC NON ACCESS LINK Link PLU UPC PGH2 MIKE PREV PGH2 MIKE e LINK TBL Use the numeric entry method Table number for link PLUs 1 thru 99 e MIX amp MATCH TBL Use the numeric entry method Table number for mix and match 1 thru 99 e CONDIMENT TBL Use the numeric entry method Table number for condiment entry 1 thru 99 For UPC it is fixed to 00 128 E PLU UPC continued e TARE TBL Use the numeric entry method Tare table number associated with scale entry 1 thru 9 e CONDIMENT TYPE Use the selective entry method TIED Condiment type NO Non condiment type For UPC it is fixed to NO e CONDIMENT Use the selective entry method NON COMPULSORY Makes a condiment entry non compulsory COMPULSORY Makes a condiment entry compulsory For UPC it is fixed to NON COMPULSORY e AUTO COMBO OBJECT Use the selective entry method YES Makes the PLU an AUTO COMBO object NO Does not make the PLU UPC an AUTO COMBO object For UPC it is fixed to NO e AUTO COMBO No Use the numeric entry method Auto Combo number 1 to 99 If the number 0 is entered the PLU is not an object of
136. cceseeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeessseeaeeeseceeeeeeeessssaaeaeeeseeeeeeees 243 Loading Dynamic UPG tothe Mam UPC El as 244 SD CARD MOG Cee sistas ceitcectt ld at sheen alae il e le ad al 245 Reading Stored Program isthe bess eens e A A a 247 Program reading SEQUENCE iia 247 San e DIMOU 25 di 248 Be f WS Se cro ga erate artes eee ec Nee ee E fe ee ee eee eae et ae 261 Universal Product Code UPC or European Article Number EAN oocccccccccocccccccccococcconococonoconononos 262 UPC EAN COGG E ci 262 Add ON COGS eon A ee ae laces 263 MP TN Sesser cas cre sas ss aa cnet oan dasa E eed oo eta wd ee aeses tenon od ete weeseeace aes 263 Operator Maintenance ia ica as ese ia aiii ticas 264 CASO ol Power FallUre seriei 5 torere cen cee teres ce tsa a ncpteckan Lsdpae seme mess eee cae a n 264 Mase Ola Printer Eros di dla 264 Rails A O A A A A dees 264 Cattionsin handino te Presi cial 264 Cautions in handling the recording paper Thermal paper ooooncnnncccccnoncnnnccononcccnnconononnnnnncnnonancnnnncnnnnos 265 Installing and Removing the Paper Poll each eed 265 Recording paper SOCCINICATONS aci tries 265 HSM Gs PAE KOMI a e i ceases 266 Manual installing of a paper roll sso dnccecstatnetacdutedasacnedeosidsencrietad de asedunetddensmncecasndeaennaneiudstiadedunamecehale eels 266 Removing the journal paper roll ooccooocnncnnccccconnnnnncncnnoncnnnnnonnnnnnnnononnnncnnnnnnonnnncnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnancnnnnnss 26
137. compulsory NOT COMPULSORY Not compulsory EFT ACCT EFT COMPULSORY Compulsory EFT ACCT COMPULSORY Compulsory ACCT e EFT Use the selective entry method Select the ACTION CODE from the following options AUTH ONLY DIAL POST AUTH e EFT TYPE Use the selective entry method Select the transaction type GIFT CARD CHECK DEBIT CREDIT 176 E Final key continued e ACCT Use the selective entry method ONLINE COMPULSORY OFFLINE COMPULSORY CARD RD COMPULSORY e ACCT NEGATIVE Use the selective entry method NO YES e ACCT POSITIVE Use the selective entry method NO YES e CARD PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the card number NO Does not print the card number e SIGN LINE PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the signature line NO Does not print the signature line e CARD HOLDER PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the name of the card holder NO Does not print the name of the card holder e EXPIRATION PRT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the card expiration date NO Does not print the card expiration date e NUMBER OF RCPT Use the numeric entry method Number of authorization receipts to be issued 1 digit 1 to 9 If the number 0 is entered no authorization receipt is issued e PRINT LALO Use the numeric entry method LALO for gift card authorization receipt printing 00 00 99 99 e IC CARD Use the selective entry
138. creen Used to go back to the previous record e g from the department 2 programming window back to the department 1 programming window Used to scroll the window to go to the next page Used to scroll the window to go back to the previous page Used to go to the next record for example in order to program unit prices for sequential departments RECORD Used to clear the last setting you have entered or clear an error state Used to toggle between two or more options Used to list those options which you can toggle by the key Used to call up a desired code Used to update PLU unit price or name Numeric keys Used for entering figures 116 Regarding the o o 365 EE EN 4 keys you can use the corresponding keys on the screen to perform the same actions PREV NEXT pont Down __ lt S E J E t gt H ST DOW For more information about these keys see the Basic Procedures section in Chapter 13 Programming How to Enter Text Using Alphanumeric Characters This section discusses how to enter text using alphanumeric characters such as DESCRIPTION NAME and TEXT E Using character keys on the keyboard Entering alphanumeric characters To enter a character simply press the corresponding character key on the programming keyboard sheet To enter a digit simply press the corresponding numeric key Entering
139. d BASE QTY 0 PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE e DEPT CODE Use the numeric entry method Department code to be associated with the entered PLU UPC 01 Ji through 99 MINIMUM STOCK A When a PLU UPC is associated with a department the following OE Pda LEON functions of the PLU UPC depend on the programming for the COUPON OBJECT 00000 department MENU TYPE LINK TBL MIX amp MATCH TBL CONDIMENT TBL PREV PGH2 MIKE 00001 TARE TBL CONDIMENT TYPE NO NON COMPULSORY e Item validation print compulsory non compulsory e Single item cash sale single item finalize e SIGN Use the selective entry method Plus PLU UPC Minus PLU UPC The function of every PLU UPC varies according to the combination of its sign and the sign of its associated department as follows Department CONDIMENT Serves as a normal plus PLU UPC AUTO COMBO OBJECT PLU UPC Ez AUTO COMBO No AUTO COMBO No n l l AUTO COMBO No epartment l AUTO COMBO No Serves as a normal minus PLU UPC 2 PLU UPC Ff PREV PGH2 MIKE Department i epartment ij __ Accepts store coupon entries but not split PLU UPC a pricing entries Department a PLU JUPC TP Not valid not accepted On the sample screen the price level 1 setting only is shown Depending on the default settings you may see the price level 1 through 6 settings on the screen Please consult your authorized SHARP dealer for more details 0
140. d X2 Amount SALES RANGE sales range CHARGE Customer no payment ACCOUNT STACKED Stacked report1 report 1 Stacked reporti f X1 Z1 X2 Z2 A REPORT Stacked report 2 UN X1 Z1 X2 Z2 E JOURNAL Electronic journal xz 1 You can pick up PLU UPC codes for issuing a report You can pick up new PLU UPC codes or the codes that were picked up last time To pick up new codes select 1 NEW PICK UP and follow the procedure below to pick up new codes To pick up the codes that were picked up last time select 2 LAST PICK UP Follow the below procedure for picking up PLU UPC codes To pick up another code PLU UPC code z ea PLU code max 5digits E code max 13digits 2 Scanning UPC code To pick up PLU UPC codes FOR that were picked up the last time To pick up all PLU UPC codes The following reports relating to PLU UPC is issued in the following sequence PLU PLU BY DEPT PLU IND GROUP PLU ZERO SALES PLU STOCK PLU MINIMUM STOCK and PLU CAT EGORY Also the UPC codes are printed in the sequence shown below Daily Sales Totals E Transaction report e Sample X report e Sample Z report 12 06 2008 000001 1799 10 39AN 12 06 2008 000001 1796 10 37AM Job code 0130 X 1 Read symbol 0130 Z1 TRANSACT I ON Report title TRANSACTION Grand total of Reset counter TR 00000000000 00 taining mode TRANS 21 0003 F Net grand total GT 1 00000154443 01
141. d for issuing the bill to the guest Your POS terminal can print the bill normal bill or cumulative bill on the slip roll receipt or journal printer For selecting these printers consult your authorized SHARP dealer Procedure Bill on the slip auto feed le xx tay No of lines of slip feed Nessa This function is available immediately after the finalization of a transaction including after pressing the or the key e If the copy function is allowed you can print the bill copy on the slip and receipt only once If you need the bill copy consult your authorized SHARP dealer 67 Auxiliary Entries WE Percent calculations premium or discount e Your POS terminal provides a percent calculation for a merchandise subtotal or an item entry You need to specify in advance a merchandise subtotal or item entry for which your POS terminal should perform a percent calcula tion e For percent calculations premium discount merchandise subtotal or individual you may use the thru keys e Percentage 0 01 to 99 99 e For ST merchandise subtotal entry The entry is allowed only when all PLUs associated with the key have been entered e For Item entry The entry is allowed only for a PLU associated with the key Percent calculation for a merchandise subtotal Key Operation Print When a discount of 10 presa tome Kay 11 18 2008 000001 1446 9 56PH JACKO002 PL00003 3 00 2 5 00
142. d it comes out of the slot Select 7 SD CARD MODE in the mode selection window 2 Select the desired type of operation 245 In each menu of this mode you can perform the following operations 1 SAVING 1 SAVE ONLY Saves the following data of the POS terminal to the SD card 1 SALES DATA 2 EJ DATA 3 T LOG DATA 4 PROGRAMMING DATA Saves the following data of the POS terminal to the SD card and clears them from the POS terminal 1 EJ DATA 2 T LOG DATA Loads the following data from the SD card to the POS terminal 1 PROGRAMMING DATA 2 CUSTOMER NAME LIST 2 SAVE amp CLEAR Specifies the name of the folder to be created save and load the data into and from Creates a new user folder Reads the content of the folder saved in the SD card 5 FORMATTING Formats the SD card e For details please consult your authorized SHARP dealer e To save or load all RAM data please consult your authorized SHARP dealer e This model supports SD cards only Use of any other types of SD cards such as miniSD microSD etc with an adapter is not supported e Do not turn off the POS terminal when it is accessing the SD card The data in the card may be broken e Formatting the SD card erases all the data in it 246 Reading Stored Programs You can read programs stored in the PGM1 or PGM2 mode E Program reading sequence To read those programs stored in the PGM1 or PGM2 mode use the
143. d price is valid only during the current transaction Procedure Price change mode Scanning UPC code Price entry window is displayed aros AA To keep the price Unit price E To cancel the mode A sonaa To change the unit price only Department key a eat yet nor ay ecnnee To change the associated dept directly by depressing the corresponding key DEPT lamer or or Dept code F ewe or or To change the associated dept using the dept code entry key Changing price during a transaction Scanning UPC code Price entry window is displayed EAN code d To keep the price n To change the unit price only Unit price Department key aa aneren tree To change the associated dept directly by depressing the corresponding key A ES m fowm gt Dept code Pe evren or oaar To change the associated dept using the dept code entry key Associated department can be changed only when the totalizer of the item is 0 45 Price change mode Key Operation CHANGE 5087654321106 PRICE 600 CHANGE Changing a price during a transaction Key Operation 5087654321106 600 Print PR CHNG DEPTO 5087654321106 ITEM J Print 3211064 i ITEN J T rice change CASH MoA When an undefined code is entered in the price change mode the POS terminal goes to an error status e During a
144. d that the condiment table no 1 is assigned to PLU code 21 programmed text STEAK and table no 4 is linked to table no 1 as the next table no When you enter the PLU code 21 the message HOW COOK will appear to prompt you to choose one option from RARE MED RARE and WELLDONE If the guest chooses RARE enter it Then the next message POTATO will appear to prompt you to choose one option from P CHIPS MASHED P and BAKED P If the guest chooses MASHED P enter it Then press the key to end this entry An example of linked condiment tables is shown below Table number PLU codes for condiment entry programmed text price Next table no 23 25 27 HOW COOK RARE 0 00 MED RARE 0 00 WELLDONE 0 00 i 33 37 38 POTATO P CHIPS 0 60 MASHED P 0 60 BAKED P 0 50 Menu item Message text PLUs PLUs 49 Key Operation Print 1 STEAK A 21 00 Touch RARE on the keyboard E MASHED on the keyboard TAX 1 26 SBTL 22 267 STEAK A 21 00 P1L1 ry 1 STEAK A 21 00 1 RARE TAX 1 26 SBTL 22 26 Y RARE 1 STEAK A 21 00 1 RARE 1 MASHED P 0 60 MDSE ST 21 60 TAX1 1 30 CASH 22 90 TAX 1 30 SBTL 22 904 JACK HOME MENU P1L1 e When the condiment entry is programmed as compulsory your POS terminal will continue to prompt condiment entry until you finish the entire condiment entry programmed for th
145. d the error message on the display Clear the error state by pressing the key and take a proper action e When you exceed a 32 digit number entry limit overflow Cancel the entry and reenter a correct number e When you make an error in key operation Clear the error and try the entry again e When you make an entry beyond a programmed amount entry limit Check to see if the entered amount is correct If it is correct it can be rung up by the manager Contact your manager e When an including tax subtotal exceeds eight digits Delete the subtotal by pressing the key and press a media key to finalize the transaction 95 Starting Cash Memory Entry If you enter the amount of cash for change starting cash in the drawer before starting entry operations you can discriminate that amount from the sales amount when reports are generated Your POS terminal can be programmed to enforce the entry of starting cash into memory For details consult your authorized SHARP dealer Procedure Select the OPXZ mode and perform the following operation Select SCM or SCM Drawer is opened and _______ gt _ XXXXXXXX gt SCM entry menu is displayed Amount max 8 digits for each currency PXZ MODE 1 READING 2 RESETTING 3 GLU ASSIGN 4 SHOD ass 7 Select 04 SCM or 05 SCM in the OPXZ mode e The SCM entry menu is displayed A SCH PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y OPX Z MIKE 2 Enter the amount
146. ding key when it has been placed directly on the keyboard instead of selecting the key from the menu e DATA ENT JOB Use the numeric entry method Key data entry job no Capture job no 0 thru 99 When 0 is programmed data entry is inhibited Program each item as follows e HALO High Amount Lockout use the numeric entry method A Significant digit for HALO 1 thru 9 B Number of zeros to follow the significant digit for HALO 0 thru 8 AB is the same as Ax 10B e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for the manual tax key Up to 12 characters can be entered You can also select a manual tax key by pressing the corresponding key when it has been placed directly on the keyboard instead of selecting the key from the menu e DATA ENT JOB Use the numeric entry method Key data entry job no Capture job no O thru 99 When 0 is programmed data entry is inhibited 151 E Tax delete Procedure DATA ENT JOB PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE E No sale Procedure PREV PGM2 MIKE Program each item as follows e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for the tax delete Up to 12 characters can be entered e DATA ENT JOB Use the numeric entry method Key data entry job number Capture job no 0 thru 99 When 0 is programmed data entry is inhibited Program each item as follows e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for the no
147. dit card to servers in cash To perform a tip paid entry enter the server code then press the key or touch TIP PAID in the keyboard area You can prohibit the tip paid operation in the REG mode by PGM2 programming NOTE When the tip amount remains unchanged in Individual Server Resetting the tip paid function is auto matically executed and a tip receipt is issued on the report printer prior to report printing E Currency conversion Your POS terminal allows payment entries in foreign currency Pressing any of the thru keys creates a subtotal in foreign currency After currency conversion finalization can be done only by cash Procedure After an entry For direct finalization Preset rate A ee oe thru Preset rate is completed or tendered After the amount max 8 digits 0 0000 to 9999 9999 tendered is found smaller than the Next registration or payment in domestic currency sales amount in a sales entry Rate cow Reentry e When the amount tendered is short the equivalent to the deficit is shown in domestic currency e You can also enter a currency conversion tender from the conversion menu window Press the CONV key and select a pertinent conversion number e The amount of change will be displayed and printed in domestic currency E Received on account entries Procedure Direct key entries For the next RA thru Amount iru max 8 digits j thru To cancel Menu based ent
148. double size characters This key toggles the double size character mode and the normal size character mode The default is the normal size character mode When the double size character mode is selected the letter W appears at the bottom of the display Entering lower case letters You can enter lower case letter by using this key Press this key just before you enter the lower case letter The shifted state is held until this key is pressed again Editing text You can edit the text you have entered by deleting and or inserting characters To select a text editing mode Toggles between the insert mode _ and the overwrite m mode To move the cursor lt or Moves the cursor To delete a character or figure Deletes a character or figure in the cursor position Moves the cursor back and deletes the character or figure at the left of the cursor Text copy paste Copy to the buffer Move the cursor to the target text line to copy and press key Paste from the buffer Move the cursor to the target text line to paste and press key 119 E Entering character codes Numerals letters and symbol can be used for programming by pressing the key followed by character codes Use the following procedure with the cursor placed at the position where you want to enter characters 00 gt XXX XXX Character code 3 digits Character code 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039
149. e 12 Standard keyboard layout cccccccccceccesseseeececeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeceeeeeesseeeeauseseceeeeeeesseeeeassseeeeeeeeesssesaeaeseeeeeeeeees 12 ODO Mal keys A iia 18 Defalilt Key texts on he is 15 DIaWernlocK key 2218 aie ot o lo das 17 DIS DIV o 17 Opera lora IS play veria 17 A aaa uate 19 CUSIOIMET CISOIAY ess o o a 20 Display contrast ads imei its tail ida ostias 20 A INOGE aee a teenittieaascenedee dai aatene ade cagsace ade a tac to e a 20 2 Selecting Operating MOE 4 bis 21 Ope rating Modest o a 21 Mode Selecione lei 22 3 Time Display and Automatic Date Updating cccccooocncccnccccnnncncnnnonononnnnnncononancnnonnonnncnnononnnnanennnnnos 23 A ne nn eet ae eo ne Renee ane ee ee eee ae eee ene eee nee eee eer mee ener ae 24 Buin Printer Sample Recerca A Ii 24 5 PRION UO ENTES te ee esate A he A aed A 25 PreparatlonS TOM ENIES narneisnie cc sec cecte esses E cee nope oats ee seana esatd ewe ec ee a 25 ETFO VV ARNG arias iio 25 Starting Cash Memory ENUY restantes a iia 26 A a a A A O e ee ee 27 Server Code ENTES eara a a a ee eee E 27 Item Selection from the Function Menu Windows cccccccccncnnccnnnnnnccnncnnnononnnonnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnneninnns 27 1 CS est Ug ks even o de a o E ee ee eee 30 Single MOM CMI CS lle E 30 lA Aiea tae aaati eh ain SAmiecah a OAL iaatt Satara on aah a manta 32 MUCOSA 33 SDI DNICING SHINES tauro ica 35 SUCCESSIVE multiplication entries
150. e ACCOUNT repor anrs a a a aa a EEEE 113 A O RN 113 Electronic OU airada 114 11 Non accessed UPC and Customer Deletion cccccccccccccccnnnonononononononannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnos 115 Non accessed UPC TED iii cade a 116 Non accessed customer epocas ica ed 116 Gustamer dele lee DO cd a o e ale 117 Dinamic UPC CIEI na air caeia 117 12 How to Use the Programming Keyboard ooooocccccccccccccocococcconononcnononnnnonncconnnnnnnononnnnnnncrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnncnnnnos 118 Programming Keyboard Layout tna ad 118 How to Enter Text Using Alphanumeric Characters cccccccccceeccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaaaeaaaaeasseaseasessseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 119 Using character keys On the keyboard ccccccssssessseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeeeeseaeeesaaeeeeeeeesesseaeaseeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeaas 119 Entera Chaba Clerc Sie oe rd r 120 13 Programming ina ats bates acsindeaeeds oovebanteswasebs in dcd seacdedes leia notado dono 121 BaSe OCC A A A N 121 Programming SClECINS ssp os 121 Programming example e no see aie ode 122 gil atole A loam ar e es 124 PDS DANII aa eoee 125 A sett ges coca oleate anata cs aubamaytduuteranaptisdascitenieeunadtaheniohae a suas ames eens Su 127 DY TAIN A O 130 O einer nt oneness 130 PUP SlOCK scictin ce danacrecannce aeanenetnge A N a 131 ENKPEU table or PLIUDO oracle indica dalt ricino 132 Condiment table ostia ita 133 Wie CoM ACH Tale ee E E 135 Combo meal table to OA erred aa ot 136
151. e LOWER LIMIT Use the numeric entry method Lowest taxable amount max 5 digits 0 01 to 999 99 TAX2 PUP 1 TABLE TAX 2 TAR PGH2 ZTAX TAX RATE LOWER LIMIT PGH2 E Doughnut tax exemption for the Canadian tax system Procedure DOUGHNUT EXEMPT Program the item as follows a e QUANTITY Use the numeric entry method Quantity for the doughnut tax exempt for Canadian tax max 2 digits 1 to 99 0 NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGN2 This option is available only when the Canadian tax system is selected 238 TRAINING Mode Selection Use the following procedure to select the training mode E TRAINING mode You will use the TRAINING mode if you need to train someone in machine operations without any change in POS terminal s memory Reports are not available When the training is completed exit this mode and put your POS terminal back into the normal mode of operation Procedure SETTING tT i 17 NEGATIVES 18 POSITIVE 19 MACRO KEY 20 FUNCTION KEY 21 CAPTURE KEY 22 CAPTURE JOBu 23 TAX 24 TRAINING PGH2 Program the item as follows e TRAINING MODE Use the selective entry method YES The training mode is valid NO The training mode is not valid e All operations in the training mode are the same as the REG mode operations e In the training mode the consecutive number is incremented e The cash drawer does not open in the training mode No i
152. e PLU During the condiment entry if you enter a PLU which is not in the condiment table an error message will appear e When the condiment entry is programmed as non compulsory entering a PLU which is not in the condiment table cancels the condiment entry e When the key is pressed the entry skips to the next condiment table which is programmed e When you enter a PLU priced at 0 00 only the text may be printed on the receipt e No refund entry is possible for any condiment entries When you perform a refund entry with a menu item PLU the condiment PLUs assigned to the menu item PLU are automatically registered as a refund entry e You may omit the compulsory condiment entry by pressing the key e Cursor void entry or touching void entry is allowed for those PLUs that are entered as condiments menu and condiment Multiplication entry can be made for each condiment item independently However the sum of manually entered quantities per condiment table should not be more than the ordered quantity of the menu PLU When no multiplication entry is made the quantity is decided automatically to reach the ordered quantity number of the menu PLU e You can press the key to shift the price level during condiment PLU entry E Repeat round entries This function can be used for reorder entries of PLU items single PLU item and condiment PLU simply by de pressing the key To enable this function the PLU must be preset as yes for re
153. e lookup file PB lookup file The information can be recalled for additional ordering by entering a previous balance lookup code a PBLU code E GLU PBLU system Procedure For automatic GLU PBLU code generation me 9 9 GLU or hw Cover count dhe Seat no entry Item entries PBLU code entry SRVC FINAL Payment operations La To issue a bill e IND Seat no entr Payment operations Individual ma ee Pay p payment suL operation pa for table To end individual payment system e The GLU PBLU code refers to a number code that will be used whenever the guest check must be accessed for re ordering or final payment The range of GLU or PBLU codes that can be entered in each terminal can be programmed and also can be specified in the OPX Z mode for each server e Your POS terminal can be programmed for table PBLU codes in a sequential fashion If your POS terminal has not been so programmed table PBLU codes can be entered manually 1 GLU PBLU code 1 to 9999 When the range of GLU or PBLU codes is programmed in the PGM2 mode and or specified in the OPX Z mode a GLU code that can be entered is limited to the range 2 The cover count refers to the number of people in a party When cover count entry is compulsory you must enter the cover count max 2 digits When cover count entry is not compulsory enter the cover count and press the key however in the table system it is automatically calculated b
154. e selective entry method Select a menu PLU or sub menu from the list 03 y INHIBIT 02 INHIBIT 03 INHIBIT 04 INHIBIT 05 INHIBIT 06 INHIBIT 07 INHIBIT 08 INHIBIT PGH2 142 E PLU menu key continued 01 TYPE PGH2 12 58PM e TYPE Use the selective entry method PLU Selects to program a PLU MENU Selects to program a sub menu When selecting a sub menu the screen on which a sub menu number is to be entered the message MENU will appear e The PLU code should be defined before programming a PLU menu key e If the DEL key is pressed on the menu key number selection menu the menu list will be canceled e If the DEL key is pressed on the menu PLU code selection menu the menu in the cursor position will be deleted 143 Functional Programming Use the following procedure for functional programming group Procedure 01 ARTICLE 02 DIRECT KEY 03 PLU MENU KEY 05 MEDIA 06 TEXT 07 PERSONNEL 08 TERMINAL PGH2 MIKE 03 GROUP DISC Y 04 GAS DISCOUNT 05 GRATUITY 06 TIP 07 RA 08 PO PGH2 MIKE The screen continues 1 In the SETTING window select 04 FUNCTION e The FUNCTION window will appear 2 Select any option from the following options list 1 2 3 GROUP DISC 4 GAS DISCOUNT Discount key Percent key Group discount Gas discount 5 GRATUITY Gratuity 6 TIP Tip 7 RA Received on account 8 PO Paid o
155. e tare table PGM2 mode UPC other PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 000001 1531 2 13PH 12 06 2008 000001 1444 1 37PM NIKEQ001 PGM2 PGM2 SCALE TABLE Report type UPC OTHER Scale table no Weight UPC NON PLU 02 2 UPC DELETE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O OOOO Oo 251 e Functions PGM1 or PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 000001 1543 3 31PM Group discount Dy status 1 2 83 PG FUNCTION 1 _ 1 100 Report type Sign plus minus Amount Function text r Key data entry job no Associated PLUs max 20 items Amount HALO Tax status S Subtotal HALO Key data entry job no GAS 28 GRATUITY CA TIP CH TIP ERA ARA xxxP0 P02 N TAX TAX DELETE NO SALE DIRECT VOID PAST VOID SBIL VOID REFUND RETURN e Media PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 000001 1446 1 57PH PGM2 MEDIA CASH 7 MIKEO001 KP0000 118 0000000000 00 Report type Print station HALO 000000000 00000000001 CHECK1 KP0000 L18 0000000000 00 0000000000 00000000001 CHARGE KP0000 L18 Function text Function aaa 2 Function programming 3 Function programming 1 Key data entry job no CHARGE 1 0000000000 00 0000000000 00000000001 CONV 1 CONY 2 CONV 3 CONV 4 SERVICE DO KP0000 000 00 00000000001 0 00 xxxx D CHK CG 1 CENTS 5 CENTS 10 CENTS 25 CENTS 50 CENTS
156. e the cursor to the desired option by touching the A or y key 2 Press the key e You need not press the key when you have touched the option directly e When you want to enter the REG mode press the key E Returning to the mode selection window from the REG mode To return to the mode selection window from the REG mode 7 Press the key e You will return to the mode selection window MW Returning to the mode selection window from modes other than the REG mode To return to the mode selection window from modes other than the REG mode use the following procedure 1 Press the fca or fwo key with the selected mode menu screen for the selected mode displayed e You will enter the REG mode 2 Press the key e You will return to the mode selection window 99 _ Time Display and Automatic Date Updating Time display The screen always displays the current time in the bottom left corner as shown below 1 PLO0005 5 00 CHECK 5 00 TAX 0 00 SBTL 5 00 HOME MENU Pill 10 38Am Automatic date updating Once the internal clock is started at the correct time it continues to run until the battery is exhausted lt also updates the date automatically Recelpts This chapter describes the part names and functions of this POS terminal Built in Printer Sample Receipt YOUR RECEIPT THANK YOU Date _ _ 98 12 2008 00000 Machine no 1026 11 03A4 HIKE0001
157. een a Minimum breakpoint Maximum breakpoint minimum breakpoint and h 7 40 the next one v cc 10 0 11 0 01 B Non cyclic 98 12 0 23 0 11 29 16 0 39 0 23 C Cyclic 1 D Cyclic 2 To program a tax table first make a table like the right table shown above ue 18 0 57 0 39 ae 16 0 73 0 57 16 0 89 0 73 From the tax table calculate the difference between each minimum breakpoint and the next one A Then from the differences find irregular cycles B and regular cycles C and D In connection with these cycles the following items necessary to program a tax table will be shown 12 1 23 1 11 16 1 39 1 23 18 1 57 1 39 16 1 73 1 57 16 1 89 1 73 22 2 11 1 89 22 1 11 0 89 T Tax amount collected on the minimum taxable amount Q Q Minimum taxable amount M1 Maximum value of the minimum breakpoint on a regular cycle C We call this point MAX point M2 Maximum value of the minimum breakpoint on a regular cycle D We call this point MAX point M Range of the minimum breakpoint on a regular cycle difference between Q and M1 between M1 and M2 236 E Table tax continued Procedure Select the desired tax no from the taxes list TAXI 1 TABLE TAX 2 02PM 2 04PM 2 TAX PGH2 TABLE TAX 1 INTERVAL LOW 0 99 2 INTERVAL OVR 1 00 PGH2 TABLE TAX y TAX RATE 0 00007
158. el 1 sample X report Sales q ty and amount for price The subsequent printout occurs 1 Net sales for price level 1 El If you need these information please consult your dealer J P00045 PL00045 NET SLS 2 0000 90 00 2 0000 90 00 TOTAL 187 0980 2237 50 COMBO TL 2 0000 7 00 COMBO 2 0000 7 00 Combo sales for E CP gt 0000 200 price level 171 WASTE TL 2 0000 ag CP 9 0000 8 00 NET TL 178 0980 2132 00 Mae u o m A mm A a eee eee re ey ey oe aa 27 0100 27 0100 185 00 185 00 UPC 12 0030 89 10 509988765 A 12 0030 89 10 ITEM A 0120 71 25 0 PLOOOO 17 0010 124 95 n 74 03 cP 2 0000 1 00 209988 7654303 ITEM B 2 0000 7 00 NET SLS 2 0000 7 00 1 21 5099887654304 ITEM M 4 0000 18 00 NET SLS 4 0000 18 00 18 70 17 0010 12 0210 NET SLS 12 0210 123 95 264 00 264 00 5 0020 62 55 NET SLS 3 0020 62 55 9 0080 170 00 WASTE 1 0000 10 00 NET SLS 8 0080 160 00 TOTAL 11 0120 96 25 WASTE TL 0 0000 0 00 0 00 RF TL 0 0000 0 00 CP 0 0000 0 00 NET TL 11 0120 96 25 100 00 95 Total sales q ty and total sales amount for price level 1 E PLU UPC pick up report e Sample X report e Sample Z report 12 06 2008 _ 000001 1670 11 21PM
159. elect ACTION CODE from the following options AUTH ONLY DIAL POST AUTH e EFT TYPE Use the selective entry method Select the transaction type GIFT CARD CHECK DEBIT CREDIT e ACCT Use the selective entry method ONLINE COMPULSORY OFFLINE COMPULSORY CARD RD COMPULSORY e ACCT NEGATIVE Use the selective entry method NO YES e ACCT POSITIVE Use the selective entry method NO YES e CARD PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the card number NO Does not print the card number e SIGN LINE PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the signature line NO Does not print the signature line e CARD HOLDER PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the name of the card holder NO Does not print the name of the card holder e EXPIRATION PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the card expiration date NO Does not print the card expiration date e NUMBER OF RCPT Use the numeric entry method Number of authorization receipts to be issued 1 digit 1 to 9 If the number 0 is entered no authorization receipt is issued e PRINT LALO Use the numeric entry method LALO for gift card authorization receipt printing 00 00 99 99 e IC CARD Use the selective entry method YES Enables IC card entry NO Disables IC card entry 165 E Charge keys continued e TIP LINE PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the tip line NO Does not pri
160. en it has been placed directly on the key board instead of selecting the key from the menu 162 E Charge keys Procedure Select the desired charge key from the charge keys list CHARGE1 TEXT GROSS TEXT RFND CHARGE1 HALO 18 MS GLU PBLU ENABLE 4 ln SHORT TENDER ENABLE MS HEADER ON BILL NO 4 FOOTER ON BILL NO 2 CLOSED GC NO RETAINED Bataan PGH2 MIKE The screen continues Program each item as follows e TEXT GROSS Use the character entry method Description for the charge gross sales key Up to 12 characters can be entered e TEXT REFUND Use the character entry method Description for the refunded charge key Up to 12 characters can be entered e HALO High Amount Lockout use the numeric entry method AB is the same as Ax 10B A Significant digit O thru 9 B Number of zeros to follow the significant digit O thru 8 You can set AB at 18 for no limitation e GLU PBLU Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Makes GLU PBLU entry compulsory INHIBIT Inhibits GLU PBLU entry ENABLE Enables GLU PBLU entry e SHORT TENDER Use the selective entry method DISABLE Disables short amount tender ENABLE Enables short amount tender e HEADER ON BILL Use the selective entry method YES Enables header printing on the bill NO Disables header printing on the bill e FOOTER ON BILL Use the selective entry method YES Enables footer printing on the bill NO Disables f
161. enables you to assign a number as a CVM control character to each department This number is converted to a two digit character code that is transmitted for use with a CVM device e DOUGHNUT EXEMPT Use the selective entry method YES Enables the doughnut tax exemption Canadian tax system NO Disables the doughnut tax exemption e DATA ENT JOB Use the numeric entry method Key data entry job number Capture job number O thru 99 When 0 is programmed data entry is inhibited 126 E PLU UPC e In this manual the word UPC represents UPC Universal Product Code and the word EAN represents EAN European Article Number e With regard to the UPC codes available to this POS terminal please refer to Chapter 14 Procedure Program each item as follows e PRICE 1 thru 6 Use the numeric entry method Unit price of each price level max 6 digits Select the desired PLU code from the PLUS list or directly enter a PLU UPC code e NAME 1 thru 6 Use the character entry method Description for a PLU UPC for each price level Up to 8 or 16 characters can be entered e KP TEXT 1 thru 6 Use the character entry method PLO0001 PL00001 Description of text for kitchen printer for each price level TOUCH KEY TEXT 00001 DEPT CODE ji Up to 12 characters can be entered SIGN ro je e TOUCH KEY TEXT Use the character entry method Description for a PLU touch key Up to 12 characters can be entere
162. er held by a white retainer in the lifted up position Be sure to remove this retainer and push down the print head release lever before you use the terminal Print head release lever The print head can be lifted by the green lever on the right side of the printer Pulling the lever forward lifts the print head up If the paper becomes jammed you need to lift the print head Cutter open tab If a paper jam occurs pull the cutter unit open while pushing the cutter open lever to the right Then remove the paper jam inside the printer For further information refer to the Removing a paper jam section in the Opera tor Maintenance chapter Printer cover Take up spool Paper roll location Paper chute Cutter open tab yj NY Cutter unit Print head release se Do not attempt to remove the paper roll with the head in the down position This may result in damage to the printer and print head 10 RS232 Connector SD Card Slot E Opening the RS232 connector cover To open the RS232 connector cover push the part of the cover as indicated by the arrow in the illustration on the left To close the cover push the same part in until you hear it click To open the SD card slot cover push the part or the cover as indicated by the arrow in the illustration on the left To close the cover push the same part in until you hear it click For further infomation refer to the SD Card M
163. er the last resetting operation You can take this report any number of times It does not affect the POS terminal s memory e Use the resetting function Z when you need to clear the POS terminal s memory Resetting operation prints all sales information and clears the entire memory except GT1 through GT3 the reset count and the consecutive number e X1 and Z1 reports show daily sales information You can take these reports in the X1 Z1 mode e X2 and Z2 reports show periodic monthly consolidation information You can take these reports in the X2 Z2 mode e In the OPXZ mode a server cashier can take his or her report e If you want to stop printing a report press the key Even if the printing is stopped the consecutive number and Z counter if you are printing a Z report is increased by one E How to take an OPXZ X1 Z1 or X2 Z2 report To take an OPX X1 or X2 report 1 Enter the OPXZ X1 Z1 or X2 Z2 mode from the mode selection window 2 Select 1 READING to display the report list 3 Select a report title listed in the table shown later When you select an item in parentheses on the opening screen you can jump to the associated report title s 4 If needed enter the corresponding values in the Data to be entered column in the table shown later To take an OPX Z1 or Z2 report Enter the OPXZ X1 Z1 or X2 Z2 mode from the mode selection window Select 2 RESETTING to display the report list
164. eric key data area Time area Common status area Total and REG status display area Cursor down key Main display area Shows sales information you have just entered Total and REG status display area Shows the sales total Scroll guidance Cursor up down keys o Shows the scroll guidance ie to indicate you can scroll in the arrow direction using the cursor up down keys A iv when the transaction information occupies more than 8 lines Keyboard area Shows the keyboard By pressing a menu key such as key a function menu key or a PLU menu keys the currently displayed keys are replaced by the keys assigned to the menu key Information area 1 Shows the following items Server name Shows the current server name Menu title Shows the current menu title Server code Shows the current server code Electronic mail indicator M Appears when an electronic mail is received ot 47 Item text Appears when an item is selected on the main display area or registered Modification status Shows REFUND RETURN or the like when the corresponding key is pressed Information area 2 Shows the GLU code during a GLU entry Time area Shows the current time Common status area Shows the following items Price level shift indicator P1 P6 Shows the current PLU UPC price level PLU level shift indicator L1 L5 Shows the current PLU level Receipt shift indicator r Shows the receipt shift status T Log near full indicator f
165. ete When you execute the delete job UPC DELETE in the X1 mode you can delete the UPC codes which have not been accessed during the period you set in this program when you execute the delete job while in UPC DELETE in the X1 mode Procedure we e PERIOD DAY Use the numeric entry method Enter the UPC record delete period 01 to 99 00 Not delete by the non accessed deleting job Program each item as follows PREV PGH2 MIKE 139 Direct Key Programming Use the following procedure to select direct key programming E Direct PLU COMBO Dept key You can assign PLUs combo meals and departments directly to the keyboard In the case of combo meals or PLUs you may assign up to 5 levels to be accessed directly on the keyboard Procedure SETTING y MH El 01 ARTICLE 03 PLU MENU KEY 1 In the SETTING window select 02 DIRECT KEY 05 MEDIA The DIRECT KEY window will appear 06 TEXT In the case of setting 00020 DIRECT PLU 07 PERSONNEL 08 TERMINAL PREV PGH2 MIKE Press the key on the keyboard you wish to program or select the desired key no from the key numbers list Refer to the next page e TYPE Use the selective entry method PLU Assigns the key as a direct PLU key COMBO Assigns the key as a direct combo key DEPT Assigns the key as a direct department key next isr poom eli ene e You can also select a direct PLU key by pressing the corresponding key when
166. ever pull the paper when it is in consult with the print head position First release the head with the print head release lever and then remove the paper e Never touch the surface of the print head e Never touch the print head and the motor during printing or before they cool down 264 E Cautions in handling the recording paper thermal paper e Use only paper as specified by SHARP e Unpack the thermal paper just before you use it e Avoid heat The paper begins to develop color at around 70 C e Avoid dusty and humid places for storage Avoid direct sunlight e The printed text on the paper can discolor under the following conditions Exposure to high humidity and temperature Exposure to direct sunlight Contact with glue thinner or a freshly copied blueprint Heat caused by friction scratching etc Contact with a rubber eraser or adhesive tape e Be very careful when handling the thermal paper If you want to keep a permanent record copy the printed text with a photocopier Installing and Removing a Paper Roll E Recording paper specifications Be sure to use paper rolls as specified by SHARP The use of any paper rolls other than specified could cause paper jamming resulting in a POS terminal malfunction Paper specification Paper width 2 26 0 02 in 57 5 0 5 mm Max outside diameter 3 15 in 80 mm Quality Thermal paper Paper tube 0 71 in 18 mm e Be sure to set paper roll s prior to using
167. ext transaction It restarts time counting after that transaction is ended You can stop the buzzer alarm by closing the drawer No key entries can be made while the buzzer is sounding If the number 0 is entered this function will be unavailable 190 E Default menu level You can preset the menu level to be returned after item entry 0001 10 50AM E Available GLU code You can specify the range of GLU numbers available for each terminal Procedure Procedure DEFAULT MENU LEVEL PUP DEFAULT MENU LEVEL Program the item as follows e DEFAULT MENU LEVEL Use the numeric entry method Default menu level 1 to 5 PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE Program the item as follows AVAILABLE GLU m E START CODE END CODE 9999 e START CODE Use the numeric entry method Start GLU PBLU code max 4 digits 1 to 9999 e END CODE Use the numeric entry method PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y End GLU PBLU code max 4 digits 1 to 9999 PGN2 MIKE 0001 10 51AM E Bill number A consecutive bill number is automatically increased each time a GLU entry is finalized Procedure ILL NUMBER BILL NUMBER P PREV NEXT PGM2 MIKE 0001 10 53AM E Brightness You can adjust the brightness of the LCD Procedure BRIGHTNESS PUP BRIGHTNESS Program the item as follows e BILL NUMBER Use the numeric entry method Enter a number max 4 digits O to 9999 that is one less tha
168. exts The default texts are as follows x lt e alallala 2 218 m m Z 09 PO2 D m V AL Awa un e da 23 El El 1 S Ww Z PRINT BILL Tj 2 35 U Q m US lt O 2 5 57 Default text SUB TOTAL MODE HOME CASH TOTAL TIME NS SCALE OPEN TARE PLU UPC GCCOPY RCPT RA RA2 PO PO2 REPEAT RCP ON OFF WASTE MDS ST TRY ST FS CBN SHIFT PRINT BILL CHARGE TIP CASH TIP TIP PAID VOID 15 A Y lt OID lt n UA DU EFUN J a ETUR Z gt Z OO a logo gt Sm m 35 C QO ERVIC m E gt E Oo EPOS 3 Oo D JI TO Se 0 A TI STEN U m ae J un Ho Z mo OE ERVER op ma 58 BALANC g S 3 m 2 Default text VOID ST VD REFUND RETURN TAX COVER COUNT PBAL N C SRVC FINAL DEPO DEPO REFUND B T FSTEND FSTENDEBT CASH BN SRV RP SND GRATUITY BAL AMOUNT DEPT INQ PRICE CHANGE CUST BIRTH TRANS OUT ke lt RAN Ww PAY F SAL S WAST J Z J un 2 x gt A Ho m y Bo om eu Z Os 22 22 Cc S N m 5 S Ww SH ES LEVEL ES El al es O 2 SF T PRICE PRICE SFTI SFT6 Default text TRANS IN SEAT PAY RF SAL B S WASTE C NEXT NEXT EDIT TIP REPEAT ROUND GLU RC UPSIZE GC BAL MGR
169. following procedure 1 In the mode selection window select the PGM1 or PGM2 and press the key 2 Select 01 READING from the PGM1 or PGM2 mode window to display the items list 3 Select an item listed in the table shown later 4 Where RANGE and or PICK UP are displayed on the screen select either option Select RANGE to read program by range and PICK UP to read program by picking up codes The procedure to specify a range or to pick up codes are the same as the one in sales report On the table for the item you can specify a range 1 is indicated and for the item you can pick up codes 2 is indicated Item Description Available mode 1 DEPARTMENT 1 Department PGM1 or PGM2 2 PLU UPC 2 PLU UPC PGM1 or PGM2 3 DYNAMIC UPC 2 Dynamic UPC PGM1 or PGM2 4 LINK PLU TABLE 1 Link PLU table PGM2 5 CONDIMENT TABLE 1 Condiment table PGM2 6 MIX amp MATCH Mix and match table PGM2 7 COMBO MEAL 1 Combo meal table PGM2 8 UPC OTHER UPC others PGM2 9 SCALE TABLE Scale table PGM2 10 FUNCTION Function PGM1 or PGM2 11 MEDIA Media key PGM2 12 SERVER Server PGM1 or PGM2 13 MANAGER Manager PGM2 14 OPTIONAL Optional feature PGM2 15 FUNCTION TEXT Function text PGM2 16 DEPT GROUP Department group PGM2 17 PLUGROUP PLU UPC group PGM2 18 SERVER GROUP Server group PGM2 19 TEXT Text PGM2 20 TAX Tax PGM2 21 GLUCODE GLU PGM2 22 CUSTOMER 1 Customer PGM2 23 CUSTOMER PROGRAM Customer programming PGM2 24 NEGATIVE
170. group See Customer code on page 222 16 CUSTOMER 1 CUSTOMER 2 CUSTOMER PROGRAM See Customer programming on page 222 221 E Customer code Procedure 0000000000001 NAME TEL PGH2 E Customer programming Procedure CUSTOMER PROGRAM PERIOD MONTH PBAL DISPLAY SERVICE DISPLAY REVS PUERTA EE BAGO fi Program each item as follows e NAME Use the character entry method Enter a customer s name max 16 characters e ADDRESS Use the character entry method On the second line enter the customer s address max 40 charac ters e TELA Use the numeric entry method Enter a customer s telephone number max 24 characters Program each item as follows e PERIOD MONTH Use the numeric entry method Preset a period to delete customer detail data Enter the period months 01 to 99 If you enter OO the customer detail data will not be deleted If the following condition is satisfied the code is deleted by deleting operation Date of deletion Year Month Date of the last access Year Month programmed period 1 Ex Date of deletion 8 1 to 31 2009 Period 12 months Customer Date of the last access Customer A 6 1 to 30 2008 gt Deleted Customer B 7 1 to 31 2008 gt Deleted Customer C 8 1 to 31 2008 gt Not deleted e PBAL DISPLAY Use the selective entry method YES Displays the customer s PBAL amount in case of customer entry
171. guest check entries Procedure To enter items for the last person GLU PBLU code uu Seat no E ltem entries max 2 digits 1 to 9999 SRVC FINAL L To issue the bill gt Seat NO gt ENTER Payment operations max 2 digits Individual payment operation To end individual payment Payment operations Settlement Use the following procedure Procedure GLU PBLU code gt e ee Payment operations 1 to 9999 You can make a tip in entry before a tender entry For a tip in entry the tip amount must be entered by using the associated media key e g CH1 thru CH9 for the charge tip and CASH 1 thru CASH 5 for the cash tip 60 E Deposit entries Deposit refers to a prepayment on a guest check It can be received as a cash check or charge tender You can make a deposit entry only when entering a guest check lt cannot be done during handling of a tendered amount A received deposit can be refunded by pressing the key You cannot attempt to refund an amount larger than the deposit balance Procedure EN max 7 digits thru thru thru Key Operation Display 101 ne TBLH101 A XXXPBAL 5000 berosir Or DEPO CASH pe DEPOSIT TAX 0 00 SBTL 50 00 JACK 0 00 50 00 FUNCTION MENUIS 0002 P1L1 5 O8PH Key Operation Display 101 TBLH101 PBAL 5000 FF or E DEPOSIT CASH DPST RF TAX 0 00 SBTL 0 00 JACK 0
172. he key toggles between two options as follows NO gt YES5NO5 Pressing the key displays all pertinent options Select one of the following actions e To cancel the programming press the key Select 1 YES in the ARE YOU SURE window e To finalize the programming press the key then press the key You will return to the DEPERTMENT window e To program the following department press the key The 02 window will appear To return to the 01 window press the key The following sections describe how to preset each item for programming ae ee Article Programming Use the following procedure to select any option included in the article programming group Procedure 02 DIRECT KEY 03 PLU MENU KEY 04 FUNCTION 05 MEDIA 06 TEXT 07 PERSONNEL PREV PGH2 MIKE 01 DEPARTHENT 7 in the SETTING window select 01 ARTICLE The ARTICLE window will appear 2 Select any option from the following options list z e pc 1 DEPARTMENT Departments 04 PLU RANGE 2 PLU UPC PLUs UPCs y ME aa 3 DYNAMIC UPC Dynamic UPC 07 CONDIMENT TABLE 4 PLU RANGE A range of PLUs PREV MEXT 5 PLU STOCK PLU UPC stock quantity PGH2 MIKE 6 LINK PLU TABLE Link PLU table 7 CONDIMENT TABLE Condiment table Gem t Pe 8 MIX amp MATCH Mix amp match table 9 COMBO MEAL Combo meal table re Ti a TARE 10 SCALE TABLE Scale table 07 CONDIMENT TABLE 11 UPC NON PLU UPC non PLU type code format a el 12 U
173. he auto cutter function This item is invalid for TM 295 and the built in printer e INITIAL FEED Use the numeric entry method Number of lines to be fed for a slip 0 to 64 lines only for TM 295 e SLIP MAX LINE Use the numeric entry method Maximum number of lines printable on a slip 0 to 99 only for TM 295 216 Report printer REPORT PRINTER PRINTER AUTO CUTTER LOGO TEXT PRINT Program each item as follows e PRINTER Use the selective entry method Select the printer to be used BUILT IN built in printer EPSON TM 295 EPSON TM T88 3 88 4 EPSON TM U220 230 EPSON TM T90 PREV PGH2 MIKE e AUTO CUTTER Use the selective entry Auto cutter function YES Enables auto cutter function NO Disables auto cutter function e LOGO TEXT Use the selective entry method Select the logo text printing status NOT PRINT Logo textis not printed PRINT Logo text is printed This item is invalid for the built in printer WE Validation VP printer VALIDATION UP PRINTER VP TIMES Program each item as follows e PRINTER Use the selective entry method Select the printer to be used EPSON TM 295 e VP TIMES Use the numeric entry method PGN2 Number of times of validation printing 0 thru 9 A E Remote printer KP 1 thru KP 9 Procedure KPu1 PRINTER AUTO CUTTER LOGO TEXT TOP EXTRA LINE BOTTOM EXTRA LINE 0 NOT PRINT 0 PREV NEXT LIST P DO
174. he selective entry method Select the ACTION CODE from the following options AUTH ONLY DIAL POST AUTH 161 E Check keys continued e EFT TYPE Use the selective entry method Select the transaction type GIFT CARD CHECK DEBIT CREDIT e ACCT Use the selective entry method ONLINE COMPULSORY OFFLINE COMPULSORY CARD RD COMPULSORY e ACCT NEGATIVE Use the selective entry method NO YES e ACCT POSITIVE Use the selective entry method NO YES e CARD PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the card number NO Does not print the card number e SIGN LINE PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the signature line NO Does not print the signature line e CARD HOLD PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the name of the card holder NO Does not print the name of the card holder e EXPIRATION PRINT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the card expiration date NO Does not print the card expiration date e NUMBER OF RCPT Use the numeric entry method Number of authorization receipts to be issued 1 digit 1 to 9 If the number 0 is entered no authorization receipt is issued e PRINT LALO Use the numeric entry method LALO for gift card authorization receipt printing 00 00 99 99 e IC CARD Use the selective entry method YES Enables IC card entry NO Disables IC card entry You can also select a check key by pressing the corresponding key wh
175. hod Selected combo _ ay Table number for condiment entry 1 thru 99 table no e CONDIMENT Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Makes a condiment entry compulsory NON COMPULSORY Makes a condiment entry non compulsory e PRIORITY GROUP Use the numeric entry method CONDIMENT TABLE 00 Combo group which is to be given the highest priority to in printing on CONDIMENT NON COMPULSORY SPIRIT GRO i the remote printer 1 thru 9 MODIFY OUTPUT NO OUTPUT KP No 1 0 OUTPUT KP No 2 0 PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE e MODIFY OUTPUT Use the selective entry method NO Will not follow previous PLUs which has the remote printer assignment YES Will follow previous PLUs which has the remote printer assignment 01 OUTPUT KP No 3 CHIT RECEIPT CYH CTRL CHAR DATA ENT JOB COMBO PLU 1 PRICE1 PRICE2 COMBO PLU 2 PREV PGH2 MIKE e OUTPUT KP No 1 thru 3 Use the numeric entry method ID number of the network remote printer 1 2 or 3 1 thru 9 If the number 0 is entered no remote printer will operate e CHIT RECEIPT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the combo sales information on the chit receipt in the remote printer format NO Prints nothing on the chit receipt e CVM CTRL CHAR Use the numeric entry method CVM Color Video Monitor control character 0 thru 255 e DATA ENT JOB Use the numeric entry method Key data entry job number Capture job number O thru 99 When 0
176. iment entry prepare a condiment table The following shows an example of a condiment table Condiment tables PLU codes for condiment entry programmed text Message text 23 25 27 HOW COOK RARE MED RARE WELLDONE WITH SALAD FRUITS L Conden Message text 33 oF 38 POTATO P CHIPS MASHEDP BAKEDP Message text 63 65 67 DRINK TEA MILK A JUICE PLUs Up to 28 for a table Next sondinent table number tables Up to 99 The condiment PLU programmed in a condiment table can be linked with another condiment table For Example if condiment PLU 44 SALAD is linked with condiment table 10 SAUCE as shown below choices of condiment table 10 will appear when PLU 44 SALAD is entered Message text 51 53 SAUCE ITALIAN FRENCH Next condiment table number The condiment table should contain the following Condiment table The condiment table is a group of condiment PLUs which is assigned to each menu item PLU A table consists of a message text and up to 28 PLUs You can assign the next condiment table number to a condiment table to link them The message text is used for displaying a prompting message The PLU is used for the special order setting For example when a server enters a menu item PLU a message text such as HOWCOOK will appear Then specify one of the PLUs programmed for the text such as RARE Table number The table number is intended to identify e
177. in E R sac 71 Group dib coun entie Ssa E EE 71 Remote DINter send UNCION eiia a a a ile ei ae eas 72 CAC A E eee E eae ge E E E AE E EE E E E T A T E E SEEE EA E E 72 A E anscecedecsaeaedeaeubandncnausenaasseeseeranne 73 A a tala trian eee 73 a eines terereiersee te err ee ee nee etree ot cere ere center es Reyer ee ee eae eee earn eet fe nee eee are 13 A O aR 74 CUTER CONVENSION cerati doi a 74 Receive don ac co UNC Sas 74 Palas e a o e e de io e cl ol ed te ee 76 No sale exchange is did la AR dsd oh Saas 77 Gashing a Check io 77 Customer mana deme seran 78 WASTE a e OO OE eee een eee ete eee aren 2 era eer eae nee are 79 TGO eCOM er ema eee a a ae eae eve pr aera vance et ei ee eee a e ee ee one cee 80 Gorrection ot the Last Entry Direct Void sic caia 80 Correction of the Next to Last or Earlier Entries Indirect Void ooooonncccnnccononnnnnnconononnononoononcnnoncnnonanenons 81 SUBO MO heat tenets A A des Gale tends O wna ade dak caine dee eae dae oad alin 82 Correction of Incorrect Entries Not Handled by the Direct or Indirect Void FUNCTION occccccccccccccnnncccnononos 82 8 Special Printing F RCIOAS xiccc 225224 sie a aac ca ees en eos pe cee ade es ete cree Calas 83 Printing Message Text for Remote Printer or Chit Receipts oocccccccccccncccncccononcnnnnconnnoncononnnnonencnnnononanennnnnnnnnas 83 COPY RECCIPEPIINUNO sce ce tease ade cete coesaeteahadieatcatdelesaeteaneeaeeet estes 83 Valla all A PARI
178. ing zero 18 UPC Awocheckdigt 11 E EAN 13 13 15 18 Your POS terminal automatically identifies the add on code in an UPC EAN code from the total number of digits and the flag E UPC file Your POS terminal has a UPC main file and can provide a dynamic UPC D UPC file UPC main file Generally use all UPC items are managed in the UPC main file Programming data and sales information is saved in the UPC main file Dynamic UPC file If a dynamic UPC file is generated the items entered by the UPC learning function refer to the UPC learning function section are saved in this file temporarily If not generated they are directly saved in the UPC main file The data saved temporarily can be transferred to the UPC main file when necessary by executing the D UPC LOAD in the PGM2 mode If you want to use the dynamic UPC file please consult your authorized SHARP dealer 263 Operator Maintenance In Case of Power Failure Even when power is lost your POS terminal retains its memory contents and all information on sales entries 08 12 2008 000001 er 1030 6 22PH MIKEOOO1 e When a power failure occurs while your POS terminal is 3 2 00 idling or during an entry operation it returns to the normal PL00002 6 00 state after power recovery PLO0004 4 00 e When a power failure occurs during a printing cycle the Power failure terminal prints and then carries out PLOO005 symbol the correct prin
179. is programmed the data capture entry is inhibited 136 E Combo meal table continued 01 e COMBO PLU 1 9 Use the numeric entry method SED Select associated PLUs max 9 PLUs from the list COMBO PLUN3 PRICE e PRICE1 Use the numeric entry method me Unit price of each associated PLU max 6 digits PRICE2 ERRUA EREZA e PRICE2 Use the numeric entry method 2nd unit price for Upsize function of each associated PLU max 6 digits e The PRICE1 is selected by the combo meal entry When the key is pressed after the combo meal entry the entry of PRICE1 is voided and a new entry of PRICE2 is registered e PLU codes should be defined before programming a combo meal table e If the key is pressed on the table number selection menu the programmed data in the cursor position will be deleted E Scale table The POS terminal can be programmed with up to nine tare tables and allows different tares to be assigned to scalable items for auto scale entries Procedure Program each item as follows e SCALE TABLE Use the numeric entry method Tare table number 1 thru 9 e WEIGHT Use the numeric entry method Enter a tare weight for the scale table number max 4 digits 1 to 99 99 Ibs Your POS terminal may also be set to accommodate 1 integer 3decimal weights For more details please consult your authorized SHARP dealer Selected tare table gt ENER number 1 WEIGHT PREV PGH2 MIKE
180. it price 208 WE Stacked report continued e 13 DYNAMIC UPC Dynamic UPC report e 14 TRANSACTION Transaction report e 15 CID Cash in drawer report e 16 POSITIVE CHECK Positive check report e 17 TAX Tax report e 18 SCM Starting cash memory report e 19 ALL SERVER Full server report e 20 IND SERVER Use the numeric entry method Individual server report Parameter Server code 1 thru 9999 e 21 HOURLY Use the numeric entry method Hourly report Parameter Start time end time 0 thru 2345 To take the hourly Z report you have to specify the full range hourly report e 22 DAILY NET Daily net report e 23 GLU Use the numeric entry method GLU PBLU report Parameter Start GLU code end GLU code 1 thru 99999999 e 24 GLU BY SERVER Use the numeric entry method GLU PBLU report by server Parameter Server code 1 thru 9999 Up to 255 servers can be assigned e 25 CLOSED GLU Use the numeric entry method Closed GLU PBLU report Parameter Start GLU code end GLU code 1 thru 99999999 e 26 CL GLU BY SERVER Use the numeric entry method Closed GLU PBLU report by server Parameter Server code 1 thru 9999 Up to 255 servers can be assigned e 27 CUST DETAILS ONLY Use the numeric entry method Customer details only report Parameter Start customer code end customer code 209 WE Stacked report continued e 28 CUSTOM SALES ALL Use the numeric entry method Customer sales all report
181. items from a guest check and make an entry for the payment Also you can transfer the selected items to other guest checks This function is available only in the GLU system Procedure To terminate ES B S When entering no ee oe To select the item GLU code To enter total q ty lapas an item 8 5 GLU code GLU code au lo A E MT tray Le Numeric key Le ever Original For ie Q ty GLU code SRVC For automatic oad GLU code ade aie To terminate or other Sania key e If a receiving GLU code is not entered during a bill separating operation it is considered that the payment function has been made by pressing key or other payment key e If a particular receiving GLU code is already in use a lock error occurs when that number is entered e You cannot specify the quantity of an item for selection when the stored quantity has a decimal fraction 65 Key Operation 101 102 Touch the item for bill splitting 2 ENTER CA AT B S BG Display 3 PL00004 1 PL00005 1 PL00006 ENTER RCV or BS 0002 3 PL00004 1 PL00005 1 PL00006 12 00 P1L1 3 52PM 1 PLO0004 2 PLO0004 1 PLO0005 1 PLO0006 Select or Finalize 0002 XXXPBAL 2 PLO0004 BAL FWD MDSE ST TAX1 CASH BALANCE CHECK CLOSE lt or BS FUNCTION MENU14 0002 P1L1 3 55PH 1 PLO0004 1 PLO0005 1 PLO0006 ENTER RCV or BSI E Bill printing This function is use
182. itioned If you want to change the layout contact your authorized SHARP dealer Receipt paper feed key Journal paper feed key Department keys Numeric keys Decimal point key Clear key Multiplication key Receipt print key Refund key Void key O E SBTL CA AT UP DOWN CANCEL O TIT A ENTER MODE HOME 12 e Department keys through are shown as through in this manual Charge menu key Check menu key Subtotal key Cash amount tendered key Page up down keys Cursor up down right left arrow keys Cancel key Enter key Mode key Home key PLU UPC MDSE gt El 3 5 s 3 lt O NOTE C Q E PO2 O E A ox GS Tp Y of gt op UF O m HARG TIP Z i Ei E U 4 m gt N ONV1 Q O O O zL de o SN oO Inquiry key PLU UPC key Merchandise sub total key Auto menu key Paid out key Non add code time key Function menu key Received on account key CHANGE T y O m AMT 3 gt Q FE z T 09 ET FOO Z z 7 m T es 0 ZW A Price change key Amount entry key Currency conversion menu key Cashier server code entry key Food stamp shift key Food stamp tender key No sale key Next high dollar key The following optional keys can be assigned in place of those shown in the figure of the standard keyboard layout For details
183. itive file is treated as valid NO Disables the positive check function e VP Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Compulsory validation printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory validation printing e GAS DISCOUNT Use the selective entry method YES Enables gas discount NO Disables gas discount e TAX1 thru 5 DELETE Use the selective entry method You can program each cash key to delete tax i e tax 1 tax 2 tax 3 tax 4 and tax 5 when it is pressed YES Deletes Tax n 1 thru 5 NO Calculates Tax n 1 thru 5 e DRAWER OPENING Use the selective entry method You can program each cash key to open the drawer NO Does not open the drawer YES Opens the drawer e AMOUNT Use the selective entry method You may select whether amount tendered entry is compulsory or non compulsory COMPULSORY Compulsory amount tendered entry NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory amount tendered entry e OUTPUT KP No 1 thru No 3 Use the numeric entry method ID number of the remote printer 1 2 or 3 1 digit 1 to 9 If the number 0 is entered no data will be sent to the remote printer e CHIT RECEIPT Use the selective entry method YES Prints on the chit receipt in the remote printer format NO Prints nothing on the chit receipt e DATA ENT JOB Use the numeric entry method Key data entry job no Capture job no O thru 99 When 0 is programmed data capture entry is inhibited 157 E Cash keys
184. k amount by Cash5 CB CA5 092 Food stamp refund by EBT FS RFND EBT 150 Cash back amount by Caarge1 CB CHR1 093 Food stamp balance FS BALANCE 151 Cash back amount by Caarge2 CB CHR2 094 Cash benefit balance CBNF BALANCE 152 Cash back amount by Caarge3 CB CHR3 095 Cash back amount by cash benefit CBNF CB 153 Cash back amount by Caarge4 CB CHR4 096 Items ITEMS 154 Cash back amount by Caarge5 CB CHR5 097 Customer Charge CHARGE 155 Cash back amount by Caarge6 CB CHR6 098 Balance BALANCE 156 Cash back amount by Caarge7 CB CHR7 099 Copy Rept Title COPY 157 Cash back amount by Caarge8 CB CHR8 100 G C Copy Titleg C Copy G C COPY 158 Cash back amount by Caarge9 CB CHR9 101 B T Title B T 159 Cash back amount by Check1 CB CHK1 102 B S Title B S 160 Cash back amount by Check2 CB CHK2 103 Final Balance FIN BAL 161 Cash back amount by Check3 CB CHK3 104 Balance Forward BAL FWD 162 Cash back amount by Check4 CB CHK4 105 Closed Check CLOSE CK 163 Cash back amount by Check5 CB CHK5 106 Open Check OPEN CK 164 Cash back amount by Check6 CB CHK6 107 Percent Of Net Sale SALES 165 Cash back amount by Check7 CB CHK7 108 Seat Number SEAT 166 Cash back amount by Check8 CB CHK8 109 Vat Exempt VAT EXPT 167 Cash back amount by Check9 CB CHK9 110 Individual Payment IND PAY 168 Cash back title CASH BACK 111 Tare Weight TARE WT 169 Cash back total CBTL 112 Receipt Swicth RCP S W 170 Change Cash Back amoun
185. keyboard instead of selecting the key from the menu E Service key Procedure SERVICE TEXT GLU HEADER ON BILL FOOTER ON BILL BILL PRINT OUTPUT KP No 1 OUTPUT KP No 2 Program each item as follows e TEXT GLU Use the character entry method Description for the service key Up to 12 characters can be OUTPUT KP No 3 entered CHIT RECEIPT Serer HEADER ON BILL Use the selective entry method YES Enables header printing on the bill The screen continues NO Disables header printing on the bill e FOOTER ON BILL Use the selective entry method YES Enables footer printing on the bill NO Disables footer printing on the bill e BILL PRINT Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Compulsory bill printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory bill printing e OUTPUT KP No 1 thru 3 Use the selective entry method ID number of the remote printer 1 2 or 3 1 digit 1 to 9 If the number 0 is entered data will be printed on the remote printer e CHIT RECEIPT Use the selective entry method YES Prints on the chit receipt in the remote printer format NO Prints nothing on the chit receipt e DATA ENT JOB Use the numeric entry method Key data entry job no Capture job no O thru 99 When 0 is programmed data capture entry is inhibited e EFT ACCT PROG Use the selective entry method You can select EFT ACCT compulsory or not compulsory NOT COMPULSORY Not compulsory EFT ACCT
186. l authorized dealer for service Do not try to repair the terminal yourself For a complete electrical disconnection remove the AC power cord from the wall outlet This POS terminal uses a nickel metal hydride battery pack for memory protection The battery pack must be replaced at least every three years at the user s expense For replacement of the battery pack please consult your authorized SHARP dealer PRECAUTION This POS terminal has a built in memory protection circuit which is operated by a rechargeable battery pack It should be known that all batteries will in time dissipate their charge even if not used Therefore to insure an adequate initial charge in the protection circuit and to prevent any possible loss of memory upon installation it is recommended that each unit be allowed to be charged for a period of 24 to 48 hours prior to use by the customer In order to charge the battery pack the machine must be plugged in This charging precaution can prevent unnecessary initial service calls CONTENTS INTRODUC MON lt a roots aE re Tee ee eer ee O 1 IMPORTANT sae tarro e 1 PRECAUTION 0 ee ee een ee eee tee eee ee ee eee eee eee ne ee ere 1 1 Part Names and Functions ii il dla 9 NA A Re saueseaeeeaceaetae es 9 FON VIS Wi tod 9 o eke ue a oleae tea ete tel le eal alee 9 o A A A ee eee 10 RSs232 Connector SD Card Slof ii dl 11 Opening the AS232 COMECIO COVE a llendo 11 Opening he SDcard SiO COME dd o pee de 11 A PP e
187. lective entry method YES Prints the customer address on a kitchen printer bill slip NO Does not print the customer address on a kitchen printer e CUST TELPHONE KP Use the selective entry method YES Prints the customer telephone number on a kitchen printer bill slip NO Does not print the customer telephone number on a kitchen printer 200 Secret Code Programming Use the following procedure to program a secret code Procedure SETTING th PUP a 10 OPTIONAL 12 REPORT 13 LOGO TEXT 14 DEVICE CONFIG 15 GLU CODE 16 CUSTOMER 17 NEGATIVE PREV LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE SECRET CODE 2 PG 2 3 SYSTEM Z1 4 SYSTEM PGH2 9 INITIAL D L 6 MAINTENANCE D L 7 AUTO KEY PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE in the SETTING window select 11 SECRET CODE e The SECRET CODE window will appear 2 Select any option from the following options list 121 Z1 reports 2 PGM2 PGM2 operations 3 SYSTEM Z1 System Z1 reports 4 SYSTEM PGM2 System PGM2 operations 5 INITIAL D L Initial down loading 6 MAINTENANCE D L Maintenance down loading 7 AUTO KEY Auto keys The following illustration shows those options included in the secret code programming group 1Z1 See 2 PGM2 See 3 SYSTEM Z1 See 4 SYSTEM PGM2 See 5 INITIAL D L See 6 MAINTENANCE D L See 7 AUTO KEY See Z1 reports on page 202 PGM2 mode operations on page 202
188. line Dpt Total GAS TL 035 Tax 3 forgiveness total FS TX3 077 Gasoline Dpt Total GAS 036 Cash benefit forgiveness1 CBNF TX1 078 Subtotal SUBTOTAL 037 Cash benefit forgiveness2 CBNF TX2 079 Merchandize Subtotal MDSE ST 038 Cash benefit forgiveness3 CBNF TX3 080 Total TOTAL 039 Net NET 081 Change CHANGE 040 Sales total including tax total NET2 082 Due DUE 041 Coupon PLU CP PLU 083 Tip Due TIP DUE 042 Vender Coupon UPC V CP UPC 084 Tray Total TRAY TL 183 E Function text continued 184 ae Function Default text jaa Function Default text 085 Food Stamp Sales Total FS SALE 143 Gift Card Dpt Total GC TL 086 Food Stamp Sales total by EBT FS SALE EBT 144 Gift Card Balance GIFT BAL 087 Cash Benefit Sales Total CBNF SALE 145 Cash back amount by Cash CB CA 088 Food Stamp Sbtl FS ST 146 Cash back amount by Cash2 CB CA2 089 Food Stamp Cash benefit subtotal FS CBNF ST 147 Cash back amount by Cash3 CB CA3 090 Change Food stamp FS CG 148 Cash back amount by Cash4 CB CA4 091 Voucher Purchase FS VOUCHER 149 Cash bac
189. llowed Repeat round Yes no The UPC codes are printed in the sequence shown below e Link PLU table PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 1523 12 13PH PGM2 LINK PLU TABLE 000001 P00011 P00012 P00013 P00014 P00015 P00016 P00017 e Condiment table PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 1440 1 50PH 000001 MIKEODO PGM2 CONDIMENT TABLE 01 FP 00023 00024 HOW COOK 04 fe POTATO Number of repeats Report type Link PLU table no Assigned PLU codes Report type Condiment table no Assigned PLU codes Next table e Mix amp Match table PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 1524 000001 12 13PH PGM2x MIX amp MATCH 01 7 3 5 75 HO rs 11 25 Me 250 00 e Dynamic UPC PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 1527 1 54PH 000001 PGM2 DYNAHIC UPC 9067891234506 O 1 1 ITEM N 1 1 10 ITEM Ni 600 00 00 ADO M00 C00 00 00 10 000 00000200 00 00 00 00 00 00000 KP00000 PGO 00 N 250 Report type Mix 8 Match table no Price Base aty e Combo meal table PGM2 mode 12 06 2008 000001 1606 6 24PM MIKE0001 PGM2 COMBO MEAL Report type Combo table no CHICKEN COMBO Combo meal text CKN CB Kitchen printer text Condiment entry to menu item compulsory non compulsory Print station Priority group no CVM control character Associated PLU text Associated PLU unit price PRICE1 Associated PLU upsize price PRICE2 Condiment table no Scal
190. m entry 197 E Function selection 2 continued e T LOG FULL Use the selective entry method LOCK Locks entries at a terminal when T LOG buffer becomes full CONTINUE Does not lock entries at a terminal even when T LOG butter becomes full e E J FULL Use the selective entry method LOCK Locks entries at a terminal when E J buffer becomes full CONTINUE Does not lock entries at a terminal even when E J butter becomes full e CAPTURE FUL Use the selective entry method LOCK Locks entries at a terminal when CAPTURE job memory becomes full CONTINUE Not locks entries at a terminal even when CAPTURE job memory becomes full 198 E Printing selection You can program various printing functions Procedure PRINT S PURCHA TIME JOURNA JOURNA ITEM 0 SHARE REORDE CUSTOM PGH2 ELEGY SE No L SELECT L SIZE N BILL R KP MESSAGE ER REPORT MIKE The screen continues Program each item as follows e PURCHASE NO Use the selective entry method YES Prints the purchase number NO Does not print the purchase number e TIME Use the selective entry method NO Does not print the time on the receipt and journal YES Prints the time on the receipt and journal e JOURNAL SELECT Use the selective entry method PARTIAL Prints summary information on the journal FULL Prints detailed information on the journal e JOURNAL SIZE Use the selective entry method NORMAL Prints norm
191. mary data NO RETAIN Does not retain the closed GLU PBLU summary data e BILL PRINT Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Compulsory bill printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory bill printing e FOOTER ON RCPT Use the selective entry method YES Enables footer printing on the receipt NO Disables footer printing on the receipt e NON ADD Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Compulsory non add code entry NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory non add code entry e NEGATIVE CHECK Use the selective entry method YES Enables the negative check function Any code non add code existing in the negative file is treated as invalid The negative check function can be overridden depending upon the programming NO Disables the negative check function e POSITIVE Use the selective entry method YES Enables the positive check function Any code non add code existing in the positive file is treated as valid NO Disables the positive check function e VP Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Compulsory validation printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory validation printing 169 E FSTEND EBT key For food stamp tendering by EBT Electronic Benefits Transfer continued e DRAWER OPENING Use the selective entry method NO Does not open the drawer YES Opens the drawer e OUTPUT KP No 1 thru 3 Use the numeric entry method ID number of the remote printer 1 2 or 3 1 digit 1 to
192. ment thru percent key the UPC or the PLU key by pressing the key prior to pressing those keys After the status shift operation each entry is completed the programmed food stamp status is resumed 55 Tax Calculations E Automatic tax When your POS terminal is programmed with a tax table or tax rate and a department or PLU is set for pro grammed as taxable it automatically computes the tax on any item that is entered directly into the department or indirectly via a related PLU Display Example Tax and subtotal Tax and subtotal E Manual tax 1 DPT O2 1 DPT OS 25 00 0 32 TAX 1 52 SBTL 26 84 DPT O3 HOME MENU 0 32 P1L1 1 DPT O2 25 00 1 DPT OS 0 32 MDSE ST 29 32 TAX1 1 52 CHARGE1 26 84 TAX 1 52 SBTL 26 84 y MIKE CHARGE MENU Your POS terminal allows you to enter tax manually after item entries as follows After an item entry enter the tax amount and press the key Key Operation 60 Display mm 1 PL00010 10 00 TAX M TAX 0 60 CASH 10 60 CA AT TAX 0 00 SBTL 10 60 JACK FUNCTION MENU11 0002 2 16PH P1L1 56 E Tax deletion You can delete the automatic tax on the taxable 1 taxable 2 taxable 3 taxable 4 or taxable 5 subtotal of each transaction with the following procedure Press the corresponding TAX SHIFT key and then the subtotal key After the subtotal is displayed press the key Key Operation Display 1DPT O1 30 00
193. method YES Enables IC card entry NO Disables IC card entry You can also select a final key by pressing the corresponding key when it has been placed directly on the keyboard instead of selecting the key from the menu ee E Cash in drawer You can program the description and the upper limit amount for the cash in drawer sentinel Procedure ET Program each item as follows HALO e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for the cash in drawer Up to 12 characters can be entered a e HALO High Amount Lockout used the numeric entry method Limit amount 0 to 9999999 99 Program each item as follows E Check change You can program the description and the upper limit amounts for check change Procedure CH CG TEXT HALO e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for check change Up to 12 characters can be entered e HALO High Amount Lockout used the numeric entry method Limit amount 0 to 999999 99 PREV PGM2 MIKE 178 E Check cashing You can program the description and the upper limit amounts for check cashing Procedure Select the desired check cashing no from the check cashing numbers list Program each item as follows e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for check cashing Up to 12 characters can be entered e HALO High Amount Lockout used the numeric entry method Limit amount 0 to 999999 99 e NON ADD Use the selective
194. mium e TAXABLE1 thru 5 Use the selective entry method YES Taxable NO Non taxable e FS CASH BNF Use the selective entry method scale EZUR W Food stamp cash benefit status TAXABLE2 NO Food stamp cash benefit ineligible BL YES Food stamp cash benefit eligible TAXABLES FS CASH BNF e HALO High Amount Lockout use the numeric entry method DATA ENT J0Bu 00 HALO High Amount Lockout for the group discount key 0 00 to 100 00 e DATA ENT JOB Use the numeric entry method Key data entry job number Capture job no 0 thru 99 When 0 is programmed data entry is inhibited You can also select a group discount key by pressing the corresponding key when it has been placed directly on the keyboard instead of selecting the key from the menu PGH2 147 E Gas discount Procedure Select the desired Gas discount 1 thru 28 from the list GAS 1 PRICE Cent Program each item as follows e PRICE Cent Use the numeric entry method Reduce unit price for each medium 0 0 to 99 9 Cent e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for gas discount Up to 12 characters can be entered 148 Ml Gratuity Procedure TAXABLE1 TAXABLE2 TAXABLE3 TAXABLE4 TAXABLES PREV PGH2 MIKE E Tip Procedure TEXT CASH CA TIP TEXT CHR CH TIP HALO 17 PREV PGH2 MIKE Program each item as follows e RATE Use the numeric entry method Percent rate 0 00 to
195. mple for details Information area 2 Shows the current job name like READING RESETTING etc Numeric key area Shows the numeric keys Time area Numeric key data area Scroll guidance Cursor up down keys Refer to the REG mode screen example Common status area Shows the following indicators besides some of those shown in the REG mode screen example Caps lock indicator A a During text entry for programming the upper case letter A appears when caps lock is on and the lower case letter a appears when caps lock is off Double size character mode indicator W Appears when the double size character mode is selected during text entry for programming Page up down keys P UP P DOWN Used to scroll the window to go to the next page or back to the previous page Next Previous record key NEXT PREV Used to go to the next record or back to the previous record Item list key LIST Used to list programmable options You can also toggle the options with the key E Display angle The operator display can be tilted for the best viewing angle It can be tilted within 45 degrees as shown in the above illustrations CAUTION Do not pull or push the display beyond the allowable tilt angle range 45 degrees nor apply excessive pressure to the display 19 E Customer display pop up type OIE LITO TO 101 1L E Display contrast adjustment operator display You can adjust the con
196. n override it e AB is the same as A x 10B A Significant digit for LALO 1 thru 9 B Number of zeros to follow the significant digit for LALO 0 thru 7 e AGE LIMITATION Use the numeric entry method Age limitation 0 thru 99 When a department for which a figure other than zero 01 to 99 has been programmed as the age limitation is entered the birthday entry must be completed e SERVER GROUP No Use the numeric entry method Server group number 0 thru 9 Every department can be assigned to any of the server groups The sales total of each department group is printed on the server report e GROUP No Use the numeric entry method Group number 0 thru 9 You can assign departments to a maximum of nine groups This programming enables you to take group sales reports e MODIFY OUTPUT Use the selective entry method NO Disables output to network remote printers YES Enables output to network remote printers Modified to follow a previous item e OUTPUT KP No 1 thru 3 Use the numeric entry method ID number of the network remote printer 1 2 or 3 1 thru 9 If the number 0 is entered no remote printer will operate e CHIT RECEIPT Use the selective entry method YES Prints the department sales information on the chit receipt in the remote printer format NO Prints nothing on the chit receipt e CVM CTRL CHAR Use the numeric entry method CVM Color Video Monitor control character 0 thru 255 e This programming
197. n the desired starting number e BRIGHTNESS Use the numeric entry Method Brightness of the LCD 0 to 13 13 Is the brightest PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE 0001 10 54AM 191 Date Time Setting Use the following procedure to set the date and time E Date time You can set the date and time for the POS terminal Procedure H SETTING INIA a 10 OPTIONAL 11 SECRET CODE 12 REPORT 13 LOGO TEXT 14 DEVICE CONFIG 15 GLU CODE 16 CUSTOMER PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE 1 In the SETTING window select 09 DATE TIME e The DATE TIME window will appear DATE TIME DATE 2 Set each item as follows TIME e DATE Use the numeric entry method Enter the month 2 digits day 2 digits and year 2 digits in this sequence PREV PGN2 MIKE e TIME Use the numeric entry method Set the time max 4 digits on the military time 24 hour system For example to set 2 30 AM enter 0230 and to set 2 30 PM enter 1430 The time will be printed and displayed on the real time system Once you set the time the internal clock will continue to run until the battery goes dead and also update the date month day year when re quired 192 Optional Feature Selection Use the following procedure to select an optional feature Procedure SETTING tt 09 DATE TIME 11 SECRET CODE 12 REPORT 13 LOGO TEXT 14 DEVICE CONFIG 15 GLU COD
198. n the keyboard area 3 Select CHG2 e The transaction will be finalized 99 ltem Entries E Single item entries Department entries direct department entries Enter a unit price and press the corresponding department key If you use a programmed unit price press the department key only Procedure When using a programmed unit price Lo umpe Le Dear nit price max 7digits Less than the programmed upper limit amount When a department programmed with the unit price as zero 0 is entered only the sales quantity is added Department entries indirect department entries Procedure When using a programmed price The pop up window for amount entrry will gt Dept code gt o open Unit price ENTER gt Less than the programmed upper limit 1 99 max 7 digits ont For Preset only type Key Operation Display 1200 Les 1 DPT O 12 00 6 1DPT O6 6 00 1DPT 0O8 8 00 e pes 1 DPT O5 6 80 a MDSE ST 32 80 9 060 Em TAXI 1 97 onar CASH 34 77 TAX 1 97 SBTL 34 77 JACK PLU entries indirect PLU entries Enter a PLU code and press the key Procedure PLU code When a PLU programmed with the unit price as zero 0 is entered only the sales quantity is added Subdepartment open PLU entries Procedure When using a programmed price The pop up window for amount entry will open gt PLU code gt Unit price
199. n the remote printer format NO Prints nothing on the chit receipt e DATA ENT JOB Use the numeric entry method Key data entry job no Capture job no O thru 99 When 0 is programmed data capture entry is inhibited You can also select a food stamp tender key by pressing the corresponding key when it has been placed directly on the keyboard instead of selecting the key from the menu 168 E FSTEND EBT key For food stamp tendering by EBT Electronic Benefits Transfer Procedure FS TEND ROR E 1 FS TEND 2 FS TEND EBT PGH2 FS TEND EBT UE TEXT FS TEND EBT GLU PBLU HEADER ON BILL FOOTER ON BILL CLOSED GC NO RETAINED BILL PRINT NON COMPULSORY FOOTER ON RCPT NO NON ADD NON COMPULSORY LIST PGH2 The screen continues Program each item as follows e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for the check key Up to 12 characters can be entered e GLU PBLU Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Makes GLU PBLU entry compulsory INHIBIT Inhibits GLU PBLU entry ENABLE Enables GLU PBLU entry e HEADER ON BILL Use the selective entry method YES Enables header printing on the bill NO Disables header printing on the bill e FOOTER ON BILL Use the selective entry method YES Enables footer printing on the bill NO Disables footer printing on the bill e CLOSED GC Use the selective entry method RETAIN Retains the closed GLU PBLU sum
200. nat to allow coupon entries Key Operation 1400 250 250 CA AT Normal REG mode entries Enter the manager code and prss aer and then enter his or her secret code and press era Return to the normal REG mode 85 Display 1 DPT OZ 14 00 JZ 1 DPT OZ 2 50 HDSE ST 11 50 TAX1 0 69 CASH 12 19 TAX 0 69 SBTL 12 19 JACK Correction after Finalization To void incorrect entries follow the procedure below 1 Enter the manager code and press l 2 Enter your secret code and press 3 Press the VOID key to put your POS terminal in the VOID mode Note the indication on the display 4 Repeat the entries recorded on the incorrect receipt All data on the incorrect receipt is removed from the POS terminal memory the voided amounts are added to the void mode totalizer Incorrect receipt Cancellation receipt 11 07 2008 000001 11 07 2008 000001 1431 12 27PM MIKEOO01 1432 12 29PH MIKEOOO1 PLO0005 5 00 VO I D PL00007 7 00 PLO0005 5 00 MBSE ST 12 00 PL00007 7 00 TAX 0 72 HOSE ST 12 00 TAXI 0 72 CASH 12 7 CASH 12 72 Your POS terminal exits the VOID mode when the transaction is completed i e finalized in the VOID mode To void additional transactions repeat steps 1 and 4 above 86 Reading X and Resetting Z of Sales Totals OPXZ MODE e Use the reading function X when you need to take an X report reading of sales information entered aft
201. nd a corresponding department key in this order and if an item entered into a PLU or UPC is returned enter a corresponding PLU code or UPC code then press the few and keys or press the ka and direct PLU keys without entry of PLU code in this order If an refunded item is to be entered into an open PLU enter a corresponding PLU code press the and keys then enter price and press the ever Key Operation Print RFN 11 18 2008 000001 1457 10 19PM JACK0002 as D v L 17 PLU UPG PL00003 R 3 00 2 17 00 PL00017 R 34 00 p s at O 2 O LY 2 E 3 T 5 H DPT O1 R 3 00 PL00011 R 2 50 HDSE ST 42 50 TAXI 2 04 CHANGE 44 54 PLU UPC 11 rro MO OQ al O JE JIE Return entries If a returned item is to be entered into a department enter the amount of the return then press the key anda corresponding department key in this order and if an item entered into a PLU or UPC is returned enter a corre sponding PLU code or UPC code then press the and keys or press the and direct PLU keys without entry of PLU code in this order If an returned item is to be entered into an open PLU enter a corresponding PLU code press the and keys then enter the price and press the Key Operation Print 11 18 2008 000001 1458 10 22PM JATKO002 PLOODOS 5 00 PLO0004 RT 4 00 MIN RETURN 7 return PLU UPC 1 RETURN DEPT PLO0007 RT 7 00 DPT O7 RT 3 00 PLO0011 RT 2 50 E
202. ng e A hash department is used to enter the amount of a special sale such as a gift certificate etc Any amounts entered in this department are not added to the grand total exclusive of tax amounts e ENTRY TYPE Use the selective entry method Type of unit price entry for departments OPEN Open price only PRESET Preset price only OPEN amp PRESET Open price and preset price INHIBIT Inhibited 125 E Department continued e TAXABLE 1 thru 5 Use the selective entry method Tax status NO Non taxable YES Taxable e When an entry of a taxable department is made in a transaction tax is automatically computed according to the associated tax table or rate e FS CASH BNF Use the selective entry method Food stamp cash benefit status NO Food stamp cash benefit ineligible YES Food stamp cash benefit eligible e GROUP DISCOUNT 1 thru 3 Use the selective entry method Group discount status NO Non discountable YES Discountable e HALO Use the numeric entry method e You can set an upper limit amount HALO for each department The limit is effective for the REGmode operations and the manager can override it e AB is the same as Ax 10B A Significant digit for HALO 1 thru 9 B Number of zeros to follow the significant digit for HALO 0 thru 7 e LALO Use the numeric entry method e You can set a lower limit amount LALO The limit is effective for the REG mode operations and the man ager ca
203. ng Dynamic UPC to the Main UPC File The UPC master file main file can be updated by loading the data in the dynamic UPC file to the UPC master file Procedure PGHM2 MODE 4 01 READING 02 SETTING 03 AUTO KEY 05 DATA CLEAR 06 OPEN STORE 07 CLOSE STORE 08 KP READING To loading dynamic UPC proceed as follows Select 4 D UPC LOAD from the PGM2 window PGH2 2 Select YES or NO and press the ENTER key ARE YOU SURE 1 YES 2 NO RENE GREAT ETSI EROA SN 244 SD CARD Mode In the SD CARD mode you can save the data stored in your POS terminal into an SD card or load data from the SA card for various purposes The types of data available in this mode are as follows e Sales data e Electronic journal data e T LOG data e Programming data All RAM data Use the following procedure for operation in the SD CARD mode Installing SD card PL As Z Y ELE 2 Lee a E SS gt a ey L7 Procedure 1 0PXZ MODE 2 OFF MODE 3 X1 21 MODE 4 X2 22 MODE 5 PGN1 MODE 6 PGN2 MODE SD CARD MODE E BMESTA BESSA RADON EN v SD CARD MODE 2 LOADING 3 FOLDER CONTROL 4 FOLDER READING 9 FORMATTING 7 Push the SD card slot cover part indicated by the arrow to open the cover To close the cover push the arrowed part in until you hear it click 2 Insert the SD card into the slot To remove the SD card push it again an
204. ng a manual tay entry option Disp 1 DPT O5 12 50 TAX 0 75 SBTL 13 25 DPT O5 12 50 TAX 0 00 SBTL 0 00 DPT O5 v 12 50 1 DPT O4 6 00 1 DPT O3 3 28 1 DPT OZ 5 20 MDSE ST 14 48 TAX1 0 87 CASH 15 35 TAX 0 87 SBTL 15 35 MIKE lay HOME MENU P1L1 HOME MENU PILI HOME MENU P1L1 You can also void an entry from the void menu window Press the key and select the desired void Correction of the Next to Last or Earlier Entries Indirect Void By selecting a line and touching I VOID in the keyboard area you can void any incorrect department PLU subdepartment UPC or item refund entry made earlier than the last entry if you find it before finalizing the transac tion e g before pressing the key This function is applicable only to entries relating to a department and PLU subdepartment UPC and item refund Procedure Key Operation Display 1310 4_ 1 DPT O4 13 10 1755 5 1 DPT O5 17 55 40 Lanes 1 PL00010 10 00 Ea 1 PL00008 8 00 1 PL00019 19 00 19 Puur 1 DPT O3 8 25 825 3 ae TAX 4 55 SBTL 80 45 MOVE IE CUISon DPT O3 HOME MENO 0001 the desired line 8 25 P1L1 4 29PM CA AT DPT O4 13 10 DPT OS 17 55 PLO0010 10 00 PLO0008 8 00 PLO0019 19 00 DPT O3 8 25 pb joo fdo pd fo fu TAX 4 55 SBTL 80 45 DPT O 4 VOID MENU 0001 13 10 Pil 4 30PM a 1 DPT OS 17 55 1 PLOO010 10 00 1 PL00008 8 00 1 P
205. nly available to the manager PUBLIC Available to the manager and servers cashiers e REFUND RETURN Use the selective entry method LIMITED Only available to the manager PUBLIC Available to the manager and servers cashiers e 1st LAST VD Use the selective entry method DISABLE Disables first item direct void ENABLE Enables first item direct void e DIRECT VD Use the selective entry method LIMITED Only available to the manager PUBLIC Available to the manager and servers cashiers e INDIRECT VD Use the selective entry method LIMITED Only available to the manager PUBLIC Available to the manager and servers cashiers e SBTL VOID Use the selective entry method LIMITED Only available to the manager PUBLIC Available to the manager and servers cashiers e VOID MODE Use the selective entry method LIMITED Only available to the manager PUBLIC Available to the manager and servers cashiers e NO SALE Use the selective entry method LIMITED Only available to the manager PUBLIC Available to the manager and servers cashiers e PAY WHEN ST 0 Use the selective entry method DISABLE Disables finalization in the REG mode when the subtotal IS Zero ENABLE Enables finalization in the REG mode when the subtotal is zero e TIP PAID Use the selective entry method LIMITED Only available to the manager PUBLIC Available to the manager and servers cashiers e TRANS IN OUT Use the selective entry method LIMITED
206. nt or Menu based entries Amount PO or PO2 FUNC pp mae gt a max 8 digits from the window 76 Key Operation Display 5000 y RCP xPI 50 00 LANAJ TAX 0 00 SBTL 0 007 MIKE in P1L1 3 S6PH E No sale exchange For exchange of money simply press the key without any entry The drawer will open and the printer will issue a receipt on which NO SALE is printed If your POS terminal is programmed to allow a non add code entry and you enter a non add code number before pressing the key a no sale entry will be achieved with a non add code number printed Key Operation Print 11 18 2008 000001 1468 10 59PM JACK0002 NO SALE NOTE You can also enter No sale from the Function Menu 1 window Press the key and select NS No Sale from the window E Cashing a check To cash a check enter the check amount then press any of the esc thru keys Procedure Direct key entries Non add code Check E amount 7 ary number When non add code entry is allowed Menu based entries Check CA CHK1 thru CA CHK9 amount from the window Key Operation Print iene 11 18 2008 000001 5000 1469 11 00PM JACKOOOZ 12345 CA CHK1 50 00 E Customer management Your POS terminal can provide a customer management function To enable the customer management function enter the customer code assigned to a customer You can enter the customer
207. nt the tip line You can also select a charge key by pressing the corresponding key when it has been placed directly on the keyboard instead of selecting the key from the menu 166 E Food stamp tender key For manual entry of paper food stamp payment Procedure MEDIA UN 01 CASH 02 CHECK 03 CHARGE 04 FS TEND 05 CASH BENEFIT 06 CONVERSION 07 EAT IN 08 SERVICE PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGM2 FS TEND PGH2 FS TEND TEXT GLU PBLU HEADER ON BILL FOOTER ON BILL CLOSED GC NO RETAINED BILL PRINT NON COMPULSORY FOOTER ON RCPT NO NON ADD NON COMPULSORY PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGN2 1 37PM The screen continues Program each item as follows e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for the check key Up to 12 characters can be entered e GLU PBLU Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Makes GLU PBLU entry compulsory INHIBIT Inhibits GLU PBLU entry ENABLE Enables GLU PBLU entry e HEADER ON BILL Use the selective entry method YES Enables header printing on the bill NO Disables header printing on the bill e FOOTER ON BILL Use the selective entry method YES Enables footer printing on the bill NO Disables footer printing on the bill e CLOSED GC Use the selective entry method RETAIN Retains the closed GLU PBLU summary data NO RETAIN Does not retain the closed GLU PBLU summary data e BILL PRINT Use the selective ent
208. od Description for a remote printer message Up to 16 characters can be entered e REMOTE PRINTER Use the numeric entry method Remote printer number 1 9 0 MESSAGE1 TEXT REMOTE PRINTER di e e PRINT LOCATION Use the selective entry method TOP Prints the message at the top of a remote printer receipt BOTTOM Prints the message at the bottom of a remote printer PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y ems PGN2 MIKE 0001 10 40AM 186 Personnel Programming Use the following procedure for personnel programming E Server Procedure SETTING PUP a 01 ARTICLE 02 DIRECT KEY 03 PLU MENU KEY 04 FUNCTION 05 MEDIA 06 TEXT 07 PERSONNEL 08 TERMINAL NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PREV PGM2 MIKE PERSONNEL PREV PGH2 MIKE SERVER 0002 JACK 0003 SUE 0004 SERY 004 0005 SERY 005 0006 SERV 006 0007 SERY 007 0008 SERV 008 PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE 0005 Ul SECRET CODE 0000 NAME SERV 005 ENTRY NON COMPULSORY G C COPY ENABLE DRAWER 1 NET SALESZ 0 00 PREV LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE in the SETTING window select 07 PERSONNEL The PERSONNEL window will appear 2 Select the SERVER e The SEVER window will appear 3 Select the server name Program each item as follows e SECRET CODE Use the numeric entry method Secret code max 4 digits 0001 to 9999 0000 e NAME Use the character ent
209. ode section 41 Keyboard E Standard keyboard layout 7 S Jh IL i OY D ala RECEIPT ll JOURNA SJA SAN O ES J e de 17 fe E iS lo NS Sa IP a de PO El AA e US m S lt w lt gt o de SC Ie JG 8 OS gt J J CP Hd e gt 1 Q DE Q Ca S SY y Y PLU UPC AMT p S B 3 Q y gt IW S a 3 y Q P P IN Y Sd s S J Q S Ml IAN EA S eI Sae C O A gt 9 Y Y INQ 15 20 IAN 14 19 F DC 13 18 e Q aooe gosos gosar gocan OOO Jere CHANGE PRICE e In addition to the keys shown above many optional keys are available to customize your keyboard For details refer to the section Optional keys in INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2 gt B O E JU zZ gt Ea ZOR RCPT VOID J TI Z U eje All the keys except the and keys can be re pos
210. ode by checking whether the entered non add code such as a card or check code is valid positive or invalid negative For details please consult your authorized SHARP dealer 54 E Food stamp tendering If your customer makes payment or tendering by food stamps obtain the food stamp eligible subtotal by pressing the key and make a food stamp tender entry before entering a cash or check tender Note The food stamp eligible subtotal depends upon how your POS terminal is programmed about the food stamp eligibility of the automatic tax on a sale of items eligible for food stamp payment or whether your POS terminal is programmed to allow the automatic tax to be paid with food stamps or not or to exempt taxation The example below presupposes that your POS terminal has been programmed to exempt taxation When the amount tendered in food stamps is greater than the food stamp eligible subtotal Your POS terminal shows two amounts of change due in its on the display the food stamp change due appears at the left on the display and the cash change due at the right 2 When the food stamp tender is smaller than the food stamp eligible subtotal e The remainder may be paid by food stamps or in cash or check However if your POS terminal is programmed to exempt taxation it cannot accept an additional food stamp tender E Food stamp status shift Your POS terminal allows you to shift the programmed food stamp status of each depart
211. oing to program Basic Procedure This section illustrates the basic programming by using an example of programming for departments E Programming screens Opening screen When you select the PGM1 PGM2 or SD CARD mode from the mode selection screen your display will show a programming opening screen corresponding to the mode you selected Programming menu Use the cursor keys or numeric keys to select the desired option and press the key or touch the option on the screen Mode you are in In case of PGM2 01 ARTICLE 02 DIRECT KEY 03 PLU MENU KEY de des Numeric key area 06 TEXT 07 PERSONNEL PREV PGH2 MIKE Common status area Numeric key data area Code selecting screen Dept PLU UPC Customer Code title PL00001 Code number and its description PL00002 als In case of PLU UPC and customer two lines are used for one PL00003 EAE code upper line code lower line description Use the cursor keys or numeric keys to select the desired option and press the key or touch the option on the screen When you select the last item the screen goes to the selected option screen without pressing the key PL00004 Selected menu message DESCRIPTION DPT O1 Setting items ae a di a Use the cursor to select the desired option or touch it on the SCALE INHIBIT fq screen aor apr 3 There are three entry methods described below PREV NEXT Numeric entry Use numeric keys PGH2 MIKE Character entry
212. ollows DEPT yee PLU CUM DATA A PLU PRICE REV NEXT LIST PO Y LINK PLU Link PLU preset Combo CVM data POSITIVE Positive number preset The screen continues 204 E Auto key You can assign a secret code to each automatic sequencing key Auto key Secret code max 4 digits 0001 to 9999 0000 Use the numeric entry method AUTO KEY y AUTO AUTO2 AUTO3 AUTO4 AUTOS AUTO6 AUTO AUTOS AUTO Auto key AUTO2 Auto2 key AUTO3 Auto3 key pee O AUTO99 Auto99 key PREV PGM2 MIKE 10 52AM The screen continues If 0 is entered the compulsory secret code entry will be canceled 205 Report Programming Use the following procedure for report programming Procedure SETTING tt 09 DATE TINE 10 OPTIONAL 11 SECRET CODE 13 LOGO TEXT 14 DEVICE CONFIG 15 GLU CODE 16 CUSTOMER PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE 0001 10 54AH REPORT 2 HOURLY REPORT 3 STACKED REPORT PREV PGM2 MIKE 7 in the SETTING window select 12 REPORT e The REPORT window will appear 2 Select any option from the following list 10SKIP Zero skip 2 HOURLY REPORT Hourly report 3 STACKED REPORT Stacked report The following illustration shows the report programming options See Zero skip on page 207 See Hourly report on page 207 12 REPORT 1 0 SKIP 2 HOURLY REPORT 3 STACKED REPORT See Stacked report on page 2
213. on e VP Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Compulsory validation printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory validation printing e GAS DISCOUNT Use the selective entry method YES Enables gas discount NO Disables gas discount e TAX1 thru 5 DELETE Use the selective entry method You can program each check key to delete tax i e tax 1 tax 2 tax 3 tax 4 and tax 5 when it is pressed YES Deletes Tax n 1 thru 5 NO Calculates Tax n 1 thru 5 e DRAWER OPENING Use the selective entry method NO Does not open the drawer YES Opens the drawer e AMOUNT Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Compulsory amount tendered entry NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory amount tendered entry e OUTPUT KP No 1 thru 3 Use the numeric entry method ID number of the remote printer 1 2 or 3 1 digit 1 to 9 If the number 0 is entered no items will be sent to the remote printer e CHIT RECEIPT Use the selective entry method YES Prints on the chit receipt in the remote printer format NO Prints nothing on the chit receipt e DATA ENT JOB Use the numeric entry method Key data entry job no Capture job no O thru 99 When 0 is programmed the data capture entry is inhibited e EFT ACCT PROG Use the selective entry method You can select EFT ACCT compulsory or not compulsory NOT COMPULSORY Not compulsory EFT ACCT EFT COMPULSORY Compulsory EFT ACCT COMPULSORY Compulsory ACCT e EFT Use t
214. ooter printing on the bill e CLOSED GC Use the selective entry method RETAIN Retains the closed GLU PBLU summary data NO RETAIN Does not retain the closed GLU PBLU summary data e BILL PRINT Use the selective entry method Compulsory non compulsory bill printing COMPULSORY Compulsory bill printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory bill printing e FOOTER ON RCPT Use the selective entry method YES Enables footer printing on the receipt NO Disables footer printing on the receipt e NON ADD Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Compulsory non add code entry NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory non add code entry 163 E Charge keys continued e NEGATIVE CHECK Use the selective entry method YES Enables the negative check function Any code non add code existing in the negative file is treated as invalid The negative check function can be overridden depending upon the programming NO Disables the negative check function e POSITIVE Use the selective entry method YES Enables the positive check function Any code non add code existing in the positive file is treated as valid NO Disables the positive check function e CHANGE DUE Use the selective entry method Whether to enable or disable the change calculation function can be selected for each check key DISABLE Disables change calculation ENABLE Enables change calculation e VP Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY
215. op up window for amount entry will open Mo 3y For actual use of this function please consult your dealer 36 Key Operation 3 on 4 400 1 5 2f j5 8 1 175 7 175 on 4 on 5 5099887654302 Mist 1 12 Ped 1 2 n ena PLU code 50 a rom the menu 3 Print 3 4 4 00 48 00 1 500 2 500 8 00 30 00 1 750 7 750 3 00 40 6 4 56 1 00 DPT 08 PL00008 PL00003 ae 20 1 200 1 200 En 00 2 00 PLO0050 CASH 210 69 E Scale entries For entry of items sold by weight a scale must be connected to read the weight automatically To make a refund entries enter the weight manually while the scale platter is empty or reads zero i Auto scale entries Procedure When you use a programmed When base wt is unit price 1 LB or 1 KG Unit price Unit price programmed tare no Stell acl SCALE a Se A 1 9 DEPT Unit price aa Dept code ENTER or AMT TARE weight PLU code PLU UPC Unit price E Direct PLU Unit price PLU code gt PLuuec SEN ENTER or AMT MENU thru eto Item selection Mn ENTER a e ENTER Scanning UPC code UPC code PLU UPC Only when you use a base wt programmed W Unit price a for PLU or UPC code Direct PLU E e RA Eo PLU PLU tt Item selection arjun ee are XO Scanning UPC code UPC code PLU UPC The pop up window for am
216. ou need these information 100 00 please consult your dealer a Programming Keyboard Layout How to Use the Programming Keyboard When you are in the PGM 1 or PGM 2 mode the keyboard layout will be shifted to the one for programming as shown below El En RECEIPT JOURNAL bon WS SN 8 9 o WIL O A o J0 OSLO gt e ee a SSS AAA SS S OO EEE SSE AO gt ep SV 22 c H M R e SES S gt C A CES 6 El o T Ancas sosog NEXT BACK PREV Aa A uw SPACE SHIFT SBTL CA AT D The shaded area contains the character keys which are used for programming Used for entry of characters For more information about characters for programming see the section How to Enter Text Using Alphanumeric Characters gt lt 4 Used to move the cursor ENTER O gt gt O gt a O m cu mu Sz Sef oo e A NEXT Qu 25 Sm 102 ius O Ics JIBE Bs m o gt Z Used to enter each setting Used to finalize programming Used to cancel programming and to get back to the previous s
217. ount entry will open e Open tare weight Up to 5 digits integer decimal e Net weight Up to 5 digits integer decimal e Base weight Up to 2 digits integer e This POS terminal can be programmed with up to nine tare tables and allows different kinds of tares to be assigned to them e When the SCALE key is pressed the weight is automatically read from the connected scale option and the net weight appears on the display e When an item is programmed for Scale compulsory it is not necessary to press the key 38 li Manual scale entries When you use a programmed Procedure When base wti unit price PARO E Unit price la per base wt i Unit price N Unit price g per base wt DEPT Unit price PLU code Unit price i per base wt PLU code gt PLU UPC HoR Net weight Fo AE PLU UPC SESA ENTER or AMT thru dei tom selection as Unit price Scanning UPC code UPC code PLU UPC PLU UPC EEN PLU UPC Ur ere Bor amr vm Bi tension ENTER Unit price ENTER 66 Scanning UPC code The pop up window for amount entry will open Only when you use a base wt programmed for PLU or UPC code e Net weight Up to 5 digits integer decimal e Base weight Up to 2 digits integer 39 E Single item cash sale SICS and single item finalization SIF
218. oy For more information about the entry methods patterns see the Basic Procedure Instructions section e PRICE Use the numeric entry method Unit price max 6 digits When the zero value department entry unit price 0 is made text of the department is only displayed printed e SIGN Use the selective entry method Assigns a plus sign to departments for normal sales transactions Assigns a minus sign for minus transactions e DESCRIPTION lt Default for dept 1 gt Use the character entry method DESCRIPTION Description for a department Up to 8 or 16 characters can be entered e ITEM VP Use the selective entry method NON COMPULSORY Makes item validation printing compulsory COMPULSORY Makes item validation printing noncompulsory e TARE No Use the numeric entry method Tare table number associated with scale entry 1 thru 9 e SCALE Use the selective entry method INHIBIT Inhibits a scale entry function ENABLE Enables a scale entry function COMPULSORY Makes a scale entry compulsory e SIF SICS Use the selective entry method Department type selection NORMAL Department other than SIF or SICS department SICS SICS department SIF SIF department e DEPT TYPE Use the selective entry method Department type selection NORMAL Normal department HASH Hash department BR Bottle return department GAS Gas department GIFT Sale by Gift Card GIFT RELOAD Gift Card reloadi
219. partments PLUs or UPCs for to persons under a given age which are based on birthday entries When a department PLU UPC for which a figure other than zero 01 to 99 has been programmed as the age limitation in years is entered a birthday entry must be performed Procedure gt XXXXXX BIRTH Birthday five or six digits e A birthday entry can be performed two or more times at any point during a transaction though the last entered birthday remains in effect e You can enter the date as far back as 98 years Ex When the current year is 2008 you can enter a year between 1910 2008 When the current year is 2011 you can enter a year between 1913 2011 41 Special Entries for PLU UPC E Promotion mix and match function This function is convenient for selling a mix of different PLU UPC items by the lump e g value meal bundle sale etc Operation is the same as for normal PLU UPC The base quantity and unit price are assigned to a mix and match table All items that are programmed into the table are treated as if they belong to one group e Using the UPC learning function you can store necessary data for new UPC codes in the training mode for later use in the REG mode For a certain PLU PLU00039 ITEM D of unit price 2 00 Mix and match table no 1 Text Promotion Base quantity 3 Price 5 00 Key Operation Display 3 OR 3 ITEM D 1 PROMOTION 39 CASH CA AT For different PLUs
220. peat entries Upon the first depression of the key those items that were previously registered in a transaction are shown as reorderable items and upon second depression of the key those items registered after the previous depres sion of the key including the first reordered items are shown as reorderable items When the key is pressed just after the depression of the key all items subjected to the repeat round entry are voided 50 Display of Subtotals Your POS terminal provides these eight types of subtotals E Merchandise subtotal You may press the key at any point during a transaction The net sales subtotal not including tax and the symbol MDSE ST will appear in the display E Taxable subtotal Taxable 1 subtotal Press the and keys in this order at any point during a transaction The sales subtotal of taxable 1 items will appear in the window and the caption TAX1 and the tax 1 amount will appear Taxable 2 subtotal Press the and keys in this order at any point during a transaction The sales subtotal of taxable 2 items will appear in the window and the caption TAX2 and the tax 2 amount will appear Taxable 3 subtotal Press the and keys in this order at any point during a transaction The sales subtotal of taxable 3 items will appear in the window and the caption TAX3 and the tax 3 amount will appear Taxable 4 subtotal Press the and keys in this order at any point during a transaction The sales
221. ponding key then again enter the amount tendered in cash or check and press the corresponding key E Cash or check sale that does not need any tender entry Exact Payment Enter items and press any of the thru key if it is a cash sale or press any of the thru keys if it is a check sale Your POS terminal will display the total sales amount E Charge credit sale Enter items and press the corresponding charge keys thru e Amount tendering operations i e change calculations can be achieved by using the thru key when PGM2 mode programming your POS terminal has been preset programmed for amount tender compulsory in the PGM2 mode e When charge tendering is performed with EFT ACCT compulsory the corresponding card authorization sequence is initiated e You can also enter a charge tender from the charge menu window Press the key and select the desired charge media key and enter the amount E Mixed tender sale cash or check tendering charge tendering In case of mixed tendering of cash and charge press the key to get a tax inclusive subtotal enter the amount tendered in cash by your customer and press the thru key Then press an appropriate charge key to settle the payment of a deficit In case of mixed tendering of check and charge tendering use press the thru keys in place of the thru key E Positive Negative code checking function The Positive Negative code checking function can be used to inhibit an entry of any invalid c
222. program the texts and amounts of each denomination domestic bill coin and foreign currency used for the starting cash memory Up to 20 currency denominations MONEY1 through 20 can be programmed For the starting cash memory SCM refer to the Starting Cash Memory Entry section on page 26 Procedure e TEXT Use the character entry method Select the desired currency Description for the currency denomination denominations from the currency Up to 12 characters can be entered MONEY list e AMOUNT Use the numeric entry method Amount for the currency denomination max 6 digits MONEY1 TEXT 0 01 AMOUNT EREKE ERENT BLESI BANON E 11 290M 181 Text Programming Use the following procedure for text programming Procedure SETTING 01 ARTICLE 02 DIRECT KEY 03 PLU MENU KEY 04 FUNCTION 05 MEDIA 07 PERSONNEL 08 TERMINAL in the SETTING window select 06 TEXT e The TEXT window will appear PGH2 MIKE 2 Select any option from the following options list 2 DEPT GROUP 3 PLU GROUP 4 SERVER GROUP 5 MESSAGE TEXT 1 FUNCTION TEXT Function text 2 DEPT GROUP Department group text 3 PLU GROUP PLU group text 4 SERVER GROUP Server group text 5 MESSAGE TEXT Message text PREV PGH2 MIKE The following illustration shows those options included in the text programming group 1 FUNCTION TEXT See Function text on page 183 2 DEPT GRO
223. r remaining in the printer comes out completely 6 Remove the paper roll from the back of the printer Do not pull the paper through the printer 7 Remove the outer side of the take up spool as shown on the right 8 Remove the printed journal roll from the take up spool 267 E Prevention of paper jams Keep the following points in mind to prevent paper jams e Do not touch the receipt while it is being printed e Cut off the receipt after printing is finished You hear the cutter sound when printing is finished e Pulling the receipt during printing may cause paper to jams How to pull the receipt paper after the printing How to pull the receipt Correct Pull the receipt paper obliquely upward from behind holding Q the middle of its side In case the receipt is short always cut if off after the printing is finished How to pull the receipt Incorrect Do not press the receipt paper from above nor hold it in the way it wrinkles This may result in a paper jam lt lia Do not pull the receipt paper obliquely rightward or leftward This may result in a paper jam 268 E Removing a paper jam Precaution Be very careful with the cutter so as not to cut yourself Never touch the print head immediately after printing because the head may still be hot 1 Remove the printer cover 2 Remove the receipt paper and if the paper jam is at the journal paper remove the journal paper
224. responding code key 0000000000000001 OVERRIDE PREV NEXT PGH2 MIKE 0001 11 24AM To delete a negative code proceed as follows a the code or move the cursor to the code and then press the DEL 1 12PM 223 NEGATIVES 0000000000000001 0000000000000002 PGH2 0000000000000002 The DELETE window appears e Press the key ip Message ARE YOU SURE appears e Select YES and press the key e To cancel the deletion select NO and press the key To end the deletion procedure press the fowo key 224 Positive Code File Programming Use the following procedure for positive code file programming E Positive code You can create delete the positive code Procedure Program the item as follows SETTING t PUP a 17 NEGATIVE 18 POSITIVE e POSITIVE Use the numeric entry method Positive code max 16 digits 19 MACRO KEY 20 FUNCTION KEY 21 CAPTURE KEY 22 CAPTURE JOB 23 TAX 24 TRAINING PGH2 MIKE NOTE e You create a new code by entering the code then pressing the key y POSITIVES PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE v Select a negative code and press Or enter the corresponding code POSITIVE PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE To delete a negative code proceed as follows Enter the code or move the cursor to the code and then press the
225. ries RA or RA2 from the window For the next RA TEND thru m RA or RA2 Amount ve from the window max 8 digits thru thru To cancel 74 Key Operation Print 12345 wm Cra 11 18 2008 000001 1456 10 51PM JACKO002 4800 creck 12345 EN HAR CHECK 48 00 EXRA 48 00 Instead of the above procedures you may choose the following received on account entry procedure only for cash payment Contact your authorized SHARP dealer to change the procedure Procedure Direct key entries RRA amount Ra or Rag Menu based entries Amount RA or RA2 FUNC A aa gt max 8 digits from the window Key Operation Display 12345 12345 4800 ls 75 E Paid out entries Procedure Direct key entries For the next PO thru thru thru To cancel Amount max 8 digits Menu based entries For the next PO thru thru thru max 8 digits NE PO or PO2 PO or PO2 i MENA from the window from the window Amount To cancel Key Operation Print 56789 wm ro 11 18 2008 000001 1467 10 56PH JACKO002 3000 omar 56789 Fo x xxP0 CASH x P0 Instead of the above procedures you may choose the following paid out entry procedure only for cash payment Contact your authorized SHARP dealer to change the procedure Procedure Direct key entries Paid out amou
226. rinting Message Text on Remote Printers or Chit Receipts You can print a message on a remote printer or a chit receipt if so programmed Press the key and select the relevant message key in the keyboard area or press one of the thru keys during an item entry The message will be printed in double sized characters together with the content of the transaction NOTE You can not finalize the transaction when a message only is entered When multiple messages are entered the last message only is printed Copy Receipt Printing When the receipt ON OFF function is in the OFF state you can get a receipt by pressing the key When the receipt ON OFF function is in the ON state you can get a copy receipt by pressing the key To toggle the receipt ON OFF function use either of the following procedures e Touch RCP ON OFF from the window which is opened by pressing the key e Press the RCP SW key to open the RCP ON OFF window Procedure Printing a receipt after making entries as shown below with the receipt ON OFF function OFF Key Operation Print 08 21 2008 000001 3 1064 11 26AM JACK0002 PLOO002 2 00 3 3 00 Print on the PL00003 9 00 dic HDSE ST 11 00 TAXI 0 66 TOTAL 11 66 CASH 12 00 CHANGE 0 34 For receipting 08 21 2008 000001 41064 11 26AM JACKO002 PLOO002 2 00 3 3 00 Print on the PL00003 9 00 receipt MDSE ST 11 00 TAXI 0 66 TOTAL 11 66 CASH 12 00 CHANGE 0 34
227. ro Returning every transaction to the present level Numeric entry Level no 1 to 5 HEV Uy Pro Finalization Direct PLU When using the FF method PLU you need not press the key for a multiplication entry Lock shift mode for PLU levels If your terminal has been programmed for PLU level shift in the lock shift mode press a desired PLU level shift key before a numeric entry D no 1 to 5 e When using the FF method PLU you need not press the key for a multiplication entry Numeric entry Uy L on The current level is hold Direct PLU 47 E PLU price level shift To use this function please consult your authorized SHARP dealer Six different price levels can be programmed for each PLU The price levels can be changed for each PLU registration These keys have the following functions Pa Shifts the PLU price level from level 2 3 4 5 or 6 to level 1 base level Ea Shifts the PLU price level from level 1 3 4 5 or 6 to level 2 When you press this key the price level shift indicator will show P2 Ed Shifts the PLU price level from level 1 2 4 5 or 6 to level 3 When you press this key the price level shift indicator will show P3 Ta Shifts the PLU price level from level 1 2 3 5 or 6 to level 4 When you press this key the price level shift indicator will show P4 see Shifts the PLU price level from level 1 2 3
228. ro suppressed version of UPC A that conforms to the UPC E Standards This code is used for marking small pack ages Here a 6digit number or a leading zero plus 6digits number must be entered EAN 8 Ordinary EAN 8 code flag neither 0 nor 2 lt used in the source MON marking gt H Maker code 1 Nation code Item code Here a full 8 digit number must be entered e Internal code flag 2 lt in store marking non PLU short type gt Program the format in EAN NON PLU in ARTICLE setting H Free format e Internal code flag 0 lt in store marking PLU short type gt Program the format in EAN NON PLU Here a full 8digit number must be entered On the receipt journal non PLU type code is printed like 208 price quantity information H Free code 262 EAN 13 e Ordinary EAN 13 code used in source marking e Specific EAN 13 code flag 977 978 979 used in the source marking ISBM ISSN Here you must enter a full 13digit number e Internal code used for in store marking flag character number 20 through 29 and 02 Program the format in EAN NON PLU in ARTICLE setting E Add on code UPC A and EAN 13 may be followed by a twodigit number or a fivedigit number as an add on code except the UPC A without a check digit Therefore the total number of digits which can be entered for each type code is as shown below Code entry 5 digit add on code UPC A wilead
229. rtment entry i DPT O8 6 00 indirect L va Loe 2 cae Repeated PLU de a 3 10 00 entry indirect dima PL00010 30 00 ca PL00003 Repeated PLU f entry direct PL00020 40 00 2 2 5 20 50998876543024 Repeated ITEN A 5 00 subdepartment 2000 enter entry PLU UPC DPT 02 HDSE ST TAX CASH 124 90 Repeated UPC 5099887654302 rwurc entry L PLU UPC 00 HH O olf2Zl z2 gt il voll d Repeated department entry direct using the repeat key 39 E Multiplication entries Use this function feature when you need to enter two or more of the same item This feature helps you when you sell large quantities of items or need to enter quantities that contain decimals Procedure FF method for quick multiplication of direct PLU Direct PLU eee PLU entry direct e The FF fast food method cannot be used for a COUPON LIKE PLU entry Normal method When you use a programmed unit price japo ENTER Dept entry indirect Pe oe te A PLU entry indirect Direct PLU ni ore The pop up window for amount entry will open After scanning a UPC code or entering a UPC code and pressing the key the learning UPC function may require you to enter a unit price with the display UNDEFINED CODE Enter the unit price and department code to be associated with the UPC e Q ty Up to four digits integer three digits decimal e Unit price
230. ry method COMPULSORY Compulsory bill printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory bill printing e FOOTER ON RCPT Use the selective entry method YES Enables footer printing on the receipt NO Disables footer printing on the receipt e NON ADD Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Compulsory non add code entry NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory non add code entry e NEGATIVE CHECK Use the selective entry method YES Enables the negative check function Any code non add code existing in the negative file is treated as invalid The negative check function can be overridden depending upon the programming NO Disables the negative check function e POSITIVE Use the selective entry method YES Enables the positive check function Any code non add code existing in the positive file is treated as valid NO Disables the positive check function e VP Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Compulsory validation printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory validation printing 167 E Food stamp tender key continued e DRAWER OPENING Use the selective entry method NO Does not open the drawer YES Opens the drawer e OUTPUT KP No 1 thru 3 Use the numeric entry method ID number of the remote printer 1 2 or 3 1 digit 1 to 9 If the number 0 is entered no data will be sent to the remote printer e CHIT RECEIPT Use the selective entry method YES Prints on the chit receipt i
231. ry method Name for the server Up to 12 characters can be entered e ENTRY Use the selective entry method GLU PBLU Compulsory GLU PBLU NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory GLU PBLU e G C COPY Use the selective and method ENABLE Enables G C Copy DISABLE Disables G C Copy e DRAWER Use the numeric entry method Drawer number 1 or 2 0 e NET SALES Use the numeric entry method Net sales percent rate max 5 digits 0 00 to 100 00 S E Manager Procedure SETTING D EF 01 ARTICLE 02 DIRECT KEY 03 PLU MENU KEY 04 FUNCTION 05 MEDIA 06 TEXT 07 PERSONNEL 08 TERMINAL in the SETTING window select 07 PERSONNEL The PERSONNEL window will appear PGH2 2 Select the MANAGER The MANAGER window will appear MANAGER 01 MU SECRET CODE 1234 PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 1 50PM 3 Select or enter the manager code 4 Program the item as follows e SECRET CODE Use the numeric entry method Secret code max 4 digits 0001 to 9999 0000 188 Terminal Programming Use the following procedure for terminal programming SETTING 01 ARTICLE 02 DIRECT KEY 03 PLU MENU KEY 04 FUNCTION 05 MEDIA 06 TEXT 07 PERSONNEL CUNA TERMINAL o oo MIKE Procedure 2 CONSECUTIVE 3 INTERVAL TIMER y 0001 10 45AN TERMINAL 7 a 4 DEFAULT MENU LEVEL 5 AVAILABLE GLUH PREV NEXT 0001 10 46AN 7 BRIGHT
232. s e NAME1 thru 6 Use the character entry method Name of each price level Up to 8 or 16 characters can be entered e KP TEXT 1 thru 6 Use the character entry method Description text for kitchen printer for each price level Up to 12 characters can be entered On the sample screen the price level 1 setting is only shown De pending on the default settings you may see the price level 1 through 6 settings on the screen Please consult your authorized SHARP dealer for more details PGH1 O Automatic Sequencing Key Programming If you program AUTO keys automatic sequencing keys for frequently performed key operations you can enter those key operations simply by pressing the corresponding AUTO keys Procedure Select 03 AUTO KEY from the PGM2 window To program automatic sequencing keys as follows PRA 1 Select the automatic sequencing key which you want to program 02 AUTO2 03 AUTO3 04 AUTO4 05 AUTOS 06 AUTO6 07 AUTOZ 08 AUTOS PGN2 01 E OO a eo ee 2 Enter the desired sequence for the automatic sequencing key in the programmed sequence 7503 4 gt PGN2 r 7 KEY 3 To end programming for the key touch EXIT in the lower left corner 02 9 KEY i i ey of the display 04 DO 4 05 TL PGH2 4 To program another automatic sequencing key repeat the above steps 5 To end programming automatic sequencing keys press the key 243 Loadi
233. s of cash in domestic and foreign currencies 25 CENTS 90 CENTS 100 CENTS 1 2 OPX 2 MIKE i i 3 Press the key 1072072008 000001 ERT 1290 A 10PM MIKEQ001 e The SCM report is printed SRVFOOO 1 MIKE 0 00 20 a 0 20 20 1 00 20 6 2 00 20 6 5 00 10 5 00 10 10 00 20 20 00 10 6 20 00 10 50 00 20 amp 200 00 5 20 00 100 00 3 50 00 150 00 1 6 100 00 100 00 SCH t 663 20 SCH TTL 663 20 ooouwnm oo SceooowMmon i Qo on SO a a 96 Entries Server Code Entries Prior to an item entry the server will be compelled to enter his or her assigned server code However this may not be necessary when the POS terminal has been programmed for stay down server mode OK Server code Secret code Drawer no e When the server entry on system is programmed for stay down server mode no server can sign on while another server signs e When the server entry system is programmed for automatic server sign off mode a server must sign on prior to each sales transaction The sign off operation can be performed by using the following procedure in the REG To sign off a server Nou Depending upon how your POS terminal has been preset if an item entry is attempted when the server has not signed on server entry will be prompted on the window to compel server entry ENTER SERVER a TAX 0 00 SBTL 0 007 ltem Selection from
234. scrolling message on the optional pole display SCROLL POLE DISP PUP amp Program the item as follows e SCROLL POLE DISP Use the character entry method Text for the scrolling message max 64 characters PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGM2 MIKE 0001 Q 11 05AM E Device Configuration Programming Use the following procedure to select a device configuration programming Procedure P DOWN Y 0001 11 07AM SETTING tt 09 DATE TIME 10 OPTIONAL 11 SECRET CODE 12 REPORT 13 LOGO TEXT 14 DEVICE CONFIG 5 a GLU CODE 16 CUSTOMER PREV NEXT LISTO PGM2 MIKE DEVICE CONFIG y 01 BUILT IN PRINTER 02 JOURNAL PRINTER 03 EXTERNAL JOURNAL 04 RECEIPT PRINTER 05 BILL PRINTER 06 REPORT PRINTER 07 VALIDATION CUP 08 KP 1 PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE 0001 11 O8AM The screen continues in the SETTING window select 14 DEVICE CONFIG e The DEVICE CONFIG window will appear Select any option from the following options list 01 BUILT IN PRINTER 02 JOURNAL PRINTER 03 EXTERNAL PRINTER 04 RECEIPT PRINTER 05 BILL PRINTER 06 REPORT PRINTER 07 VALIDATION VP 08 KP 1 09 KP 2 10 KP 3 11 KP 4 12 KP 5 13 KP 6 14 KP 7 15 KP 8 16 KP 9 Built in printer Journal printer External printer Receipt printer Bill printer Report printer Receipt printer Remote printer 1 Remote printer 2 Remote printer 3 Remote printer 4
235. sing the corresponding key when it has been placed directly on the key board instead of selecting the key from the menu e PRINT LALO Use the numeric entry method LALO for gift card authorization receipt printing 00 00 99 99 e IC CARD Use the selective entry method YES Enables IC card entry NO Disables IC card entry 159 E Check keys Procedure Select the desired check key from the check keys list CHECK1 TEXT HALO 18 GLU PBLU ENABLE __ SHORT TENDER ENABLE 4 HEADER ON BILL NO FOOTER ON BILL NO CLOSED GC BILL PRINT NO RETAINED NON COMPULSORY PREV PGH2 MIKE The screen continues Program each item as follows e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for the check key Up to 12 characters can be entered e HALO High Amount Lockout use the numeric entry method AB is the same as Ax 10B A Significant digit 0 thru 9 B Number of zeros to follow the significant digit O thru 8 You can set AB at 18 for no limitation e GLU PBLU Use the selective entry method COMPUL Makes GLU PBLU entry compulsory INHIBIT Inhibits GLU PBLU entry ENABLE Enables GLU PBLU entry e SHORT TENDER Use the selective entry method DISABLE Disables short amount tender ENABLE Enables short amount tender e HEADER ON BILL Use the selective entry method YES Enables header printing on the bill NO Disables header printing on the bill e FOOTER ON BILL
236. t display text CG CB 113 Free Glu FREE GLU 171 Scm SCM 114 Waste Title WASTE 172 Scm SCM 115 Average Sales AVE SALE 173 Scm Total SCM TTL 116 St TI ST TL 174 Conversion1 Is CONV1 IS 117 St Tl ST TL 175 Conversion2 Is CONV2 IS 118 ltem TI TL 176 Conversions Is CONV3 IS 119 Item TI TL 177 Conversion4 Is CONV4 IS 120 Group Discount TI GDISC TL 178 Cash Is CASH IS 121 Gas Discount TI GASDISTL 179 Check1 Is CHECK1 IS 122 Cash TI CASH TL 180 Check2 Is CHECK2 IS 123 RaTl RATL 181 Check3 Is CHECK3 IS 124 PoTl PO TL 182 Check4 Is CHECK4 IS 125 Ca Chk TI CA CK TL 183 Check5 Is CHECKS IS 126 Conv TI CONV TL 184 Check6 Is CHECK6 IS 127 Charge TI CHR TL 185 Check7 Is CHECK7 IS 128 Check TI CHECK TL 186 Check8 ls CHECK8 IS 129 PLU Repo Combo COMBO 187 Check9 Is CHECKO9 IS 130 PLU Repo Waste WASTE 188 Vender Coupon Is V CP UPC IS 131 PLU Repo Rf RF 189 Ccd CCD 132 PLU Repo Cp CP 190 Ccd Differ CCD DIF 133 PLU Repo Net Sales NET SLS 191 Ccd Differ Total DIF TL 134 PLU Repo Combo TI COMBO TL 192 Combo 1 Trn Rpt COMBO1 135 PLU Repo Waste TI WASTE TL 193 Combo 2 Trn Rpt COMBO2 136 Pu Repo Rf TI RF TL 194 Combo 3 Trn Rpt COMBO3 137 PLU Repo Net TI NET TL 138 Glu Text TBL 139 Server Sign On Text SIGN ON 290 Combo 99 Tm Rpt COMBO99 140 Server Sign Off Text SIGN OFF 141 Gift Refund GIFT RF 142 Gift Net Total GIFT TTL E Department group text Yo
237. table no Mix amp match table no Link PLU table no Scale table no Coupon object PLU Print station for UPC Blank Auto delete No delete 12 06 2008 1518 11 44AN PGM2 PLU UPC 00001 000001 01 Group nos Base q ty PLO0001 1 00001 n G00 00 00 A00 00 N00 C00 00 10 000 00000300 00 00 00 00 00 P00000 KP00000 PGO 00 S 0 000 MN 0 000 PLO0001 P00002 01 0 PLO0002 1 2 OO 00002 00 00 00 A00 HOO C00 00 00 TO 000 00000200 00 00 00 00 00 00000 KP00000 PO 00 0 00074 0 000 PLUs menu type Blank Normal PLU L Link PLU C Combo meal Price level 1 Group discount status 1 2 3 Age limitation Key data entry job no PLO0002 P00003 01 0 PL00003 l 3 0000 00 ITEM A 509988 7654303 O 1 0 ITEM B 3 50 ITEM B 600 00 00 A00 M00 COO 00 00 10 000 00000200 00 00 00 00 00 F 00000 KP00000 PGO 00 S 0 0004 0 000 ITEM B 909988 7654304 O 1 0 ITEM ff I 4 50 ITEM H G00 00 00 A00 1100 C00 00 00 TO 000 00000200 00 00 00 00 00 P00000 KP00000 PGO 00 S 0 000 M 0 000 ITEM M 249 CVM control character Minimum stock q ty Priority group no Stock q ty i Function programming 000002 L Mode parameter open amp preset preset open inhibit Scale status compulsory allowed prohibited Condiment entry to menu item compulsory non compulsory Condiment type non condiment type Price shift compulsory prohibited a
238. tal Total for received on account Paid out counter and total Total for paid out Check cashing 1 counter and total Total for check cashing Food stamp change by cash Currency conversion 4 total by manual rate Total for conversion Food stamp in drawer Gross charge 1 counter and total Total for charge Check 1 sale counter and tendering counter Total for check Cash check in drawer Cash in drawer Deposit counter and total Deposit refund counter and total Tip paid counter and total Cash tip in counter and total Charge tip in counter and total 92 E Department report e Sample X report e Sample Z report 12 06 2008 000001 1654 1 12PM JACKO002 12 06 2008 000001 1656 1 16PH JACKO002 0110 X 1 Dept code 0110 Z1 DEPARTMENT sales q ty DEPARTMENT Dept label DEPARTMENT 21 Resel counter Sales amount 17 0000 l l 10 0000 ed The subsequent printout occurs real dept total in the same format as in the 8 0000 sample X report 1 0000 1 0000 1 0000 9 31 30 00 DEPT TL 29 0000 A pa aaa 100 00 D10 2 0000 DPT 10 DEPT 2 0000 l gt real dept counter and tota QAS TL 0 0000 i gasoline dept counter gasoline q ty total GAS 0 0000 gasoline dept counter gasoline q ty total 93 EW Individual group total report on departments 12 06 2008 000001 1655 1 13PH JACKO002 0112 X 1 DEPT IND GROU
239. tead of selecting the key from the menu 172 E Currency conversion keys Procedure Select the desired currency conversion key from the currency conversion keys list CONV 1 RATE TEXT DESCRIPTOR DRAWER No PREV PGH2 MIKE E Eat in keys Procedure Select the desired eat in key from the eat in keys list EAT IN 1 TEXT TAX1 DELETE TAX2 DELETE TAX3 DELETE TAX4 DELETE TAXS DELETE Rees RESIS RESTO ADO EN Program each item as follows e RATE Use the numeric entry method Currency conversion rate 0 0000 to 9999 9999 for CONV1 thru CONV4 e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for the currency conversion key Up to 12 characters can be entered e DESCRIPTOR Use the character entry method Currency descriptor Up to 4 characters can be entered e DRAWER No Use the numeric entry method Foreign currency Drawer No 1 digit O to 2 You can also select a conversion key by pressing the corresponding key when it has been placed directly on the keyboard instead of selecting the key from the menu Program each item as follows e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for the eat in key Up to 12 characters can be entered e TAX1 thru 5 DELETE Use the selective entry method YES Deletes Tax n 1 thru 5 NO Calculates Tax n 1 thru 5 You can also select an eat in key by pressing the corresponding key when it has been placed directly on the
240. tem data is sent to the remote printers in the training mode TRAINING TRAINING MODE PGH2 239 Backup Data Send Programming Use the following procedure for backup data send programming For more information please consult your authorized SHARP dealer WE Backup data send Your POS terminal can send data to another device via RS232 for the purpose of backing up its program 3 02PM Procedure SETTING TI 19 MACRO KEY 20 FUNCTION KEY 21 CAPTURE KEY 22 CAPTURE JOBu 23 TAX 24 TRAINING 25 BACKUP SEND 26 BACKUP RECEIVE PGH2 BACKUP SEND PU SEND DATA SPEED PROGRAMMED PREV PGN2 3 03PM Program each item as follows e SEND DATA Use the selective entry method Select one of the following options data sources e ALL RAM e SSP e SPEED Use the selective entry method Select one of the following options data transmission speeds PROGRAMMED 38400bps 19200bps 9600bps 4800bps 2400bps 240 Sends data at a programmed speed Sends data at 38400 bps Sends data at 19200 bps Sends data at 9600 bps Sends data at 4800 bps Sends data at 2400 bps Backup Data Receive Programming Use the following procedure for backup data receive programming For more information please consult your authorized SHARP dealer WE Backup data receive Your POS terminal can receive data from another device via RS232 which has previousl
241. the AUTO COMBO For UPC it is fixed to 0 e SCALE Use the selective entry method INHIBIT Inhibits a scale entry ENABLE Enables a scale entry COMPULSORY Makes a scale entry compulsory e TAXABLE 1 thru 5 Use the selective entry method YES Makes the PLU UPC taxable NO Makes the PLU UPC non taxable e FS CASH BNF Use the selective entry method Food stamp cash benefit status NO Food stamp cash benefit ineligible YES Food stamp cash benefit eligible e GROUP DISCOUNT 1 thru 3 Use the selective entry method Group discount status NO Non discountable YES Discountable e AGE LIMITATION Use the numeric entry method Age limitation 0 thru 99 When a PLU UPC for which a figure other than zero 01 to 99 has been programmed as the age limitation the birthday entry must be completed e GROUP 1 thru 3 Use the numeric entry method PLU group number 00 thru 99 e PRIORITY GROUP Use the numeric entry method PLU group which is to be given the highest priority to in printing on the remote printer 1 thru 9 e MODIFY OUTPUT Use the selective entry method YES Will follow previous PLUs which has the remote printer assignment NO Will not follow previous PLUs which has the remote printer assignment e OUTPUT KP No 1 thru 3 Use the numeric entry method ID number of the network remote printer 1 2 or 3 1 thru 9 If the number 0 is entered no remote printer will operate e CHIT RECEIPT Use the selecti
242. three digits decimal e Base quantity Up to two digits integer NOTE For actual use of this function please consult your dealer Key Operation 7 Lon 10 600 6 8 on 5 15 5 on 6 o 5099887654302 bets 3 Son 5 ton from the menu Print 10 16 2008 000001 1224 11 38AM JACK0002 1 10 6 00 DPT 06 4 20 8 5 15 00 PL00015 24 00 5 6 7 50 3099887654302 ITEM M Fog PLU code 17 3 5 17 00 PL00017 10 20 HOSE ST 44 65 TAXI 2 68 CASH 47 33 WE Successive multiplication entries This function is practical for such entries as a sale of an item sold by area square foot When you use a programmed Procedure unit price or AMT Dept entry indirect PE a es a ete pee PLU entry indirect Uni pree J PLU code gt Unit price ENTER or AMT Subdept entry mu Ei Rem seston En Unir price H am pas PLU subdept entry menu OO Scanning a UPC code UPC code e After scanning a UPC code or entering a UPC code and pressing the key the learning UPC function may require you to enter a unit price with the display UNDEFINED CODE Enter the unit price and department code to be associated with the UPC e Selling quantity Up to four digits integer three digits decimal e Base quantity Up to two digits integer Der Dept entry direct PO eran e es PLU subdept entry direct ice UPC entry The p
243. ting procedure after power recovery See the sample print MDSE ST Print after power TAKI recovery xx TOTAL CASH CHANGE In Case of a Printer Error If the printer runs out of paper the printer will stall and the PAPER EMPTY message will appear on the display Any key entries will not be accepted Referring to Installing and Removing a Paper Roll in this chapter install a new paper roll properly then press the key The printer will print the power failure symbol and resume printing If the print head is in the up position the printer will stalls and the HEAD UP message will appear on the display Any key entries will not be accepted Bring back the print head to the correct position then press the key The printer will print the power failure symbol and resume printing Thermal Printing Your POS terminal uses a thermal printer When the print head is heated to a certain level printing is made on thermal paper E Cautions in handling the printer e If your POS terminal for an extended period of time pull the print head release lever toward you so that the print head is set apart from the plate Printing position e Avoid installing the machine in any of the following places Dusty or humid places Place exposed to direct sunlight Place where there is iron powder A permanent magnet and an electromagnet are used in this machine e Use the print head release lever only when necessary e N
244. to servers in cash or by credit card A tip entry should be done before a payment entry You must use the corresponding media key e g CH1 thru CH9 for a charge tip and CASH 1 thru CASH 5 for a cash tip Two different tip in entry systems are available the tip amount entry system and the tip percent rate entry system Which system is used depends on how your POS terminal has been programmed Procedure Tip amount entry system Tip amount When you use a programmed percent rate Tip percent rate ASH TIP Tip percent rate entry system 0 01 99 99 Key Operation Print 101 e 11 18 2008 060001 BILL 1024 E 1451 10 31PM JACKODOZ Ly TBLH101 xxPBAL 0 00 PL00005 5 00 serv PL00007 7 00 101 cu igi 8 00 IP 3 00 300 BAL FWD 20 00 CASH 23 00 E Tip editing This function is used for entering a tip amount after finalizing a guest check transaction This function is available when the guest check transaction is finalized by a charge tender and also when the tip is paid by a charge tender To edit or add tip amount the bill number which is issued when the or key is pressed in the guest check entry must be used in order to identify the guest For editing operation press the key or touch EDIT TIP in the keyboard area and follow the prompts on the display to enter the bill number and tip amount 73 E Tip paid entries This operation is used to distribute a tip paid by cre
245. too 3 While pushing the cutter open tab pull up the cutter unit 4 Pull the print head release lever all the way forward after it stops at one position continue pulling forward until it stops again and cannot be pulled forward any further 5 Remove the paper jam Check for and remove any shreds of paper that may remain in the printer 6 Return the print head release lever to its original position 7 Return the cutter unit to its original position Make sure the metal part is surely hooked to the cutter open tab 8 Reset the paper roll s correctly by following the steps in Installing the paper roll 9 Replace the printer cover 269 Cleaning the Print Head When the printed text is getting dark or faint there may be paper dust adhering to the print head Clean the print head as follows 1 Select the OFF mode 2 Remove the printer cover 3 Pull up the print head release lever to the up position 4 Remove the paper roll s 5 While pushing the cutter open lever to the right pull up the cutter unit 6 Clean the print head with a soft rag moistened ethyl alcohol or isopropyl alcohol 7 Return the print head release lever to its original position immediately after cleaning 8 Return the cutter unit to its original position Make sure the metal part is surely hooked to the cutter open lever 9 Reset the paper roll s correctly by following the step in Installing a paper roll 1
246. transaction you can void the UPC entry by the first depression of the key then you can enter a correct price and or associated department e When an associated department is changed the item label for the department will be also changed automatically e For repeat entry use the key 46 Ml PLU level shift for direct PLUs This function can increase the number of direct PLUs on your POS terminal without adding additional direct PLU keys You can use direct PLUs in five levels by utilizing the PLU level shift keys thru The level key shifts the PLU level to the required level The normal level is level 1 You must program your machine in the PGM2 mode to select one of the two PLU level shift modes automatic return mode or lock shift mode and decide whether to allow both the manager and servers cashiers or only the manager to perform the PLU level shift function The automatic return mode automatically shifts the PLU level back to the preset level after pressing a direct PLU key or finalizing each transaction The lock shift mode holds the current PLU level until another PLU level shift key is pressed Automatic return mode for PLU levels If your terminal has been programmed for PLU level shift in the automatic return mode press a desired PLU level shift key before a numeric entry Procedure Returning every item entry to the preset level EEN Direct PLU Preset level Level no 1 to 5 Q ty C
247. trast of the display in the BRIGHTNESS menu of TERMINAL programming The backlight in the display is a consumable part When the contrast is no longer adjustable and the display becomes darker consult your authorized SHARP dealer E Screen save mode When you want to save the electric power or save the display s life use the screen save function This function can turn off the LCD backlight when the POS terminal is to be out of operation for an extended period of time You can program the time for which your POS terminal should keep the normal status in which the backlight is ON before it goes into the screen save mode To go back to the normal mode press any key 20 Selecting an Operating Mode When you turn on the POS terminal and press the key a mode selection window will appear on the display listing available operating modes as shown below Mode selection window OPA MODE OFF MODE Al 1 MODE A2ff MODE PGM1 MODE POH MODE SD CARD MODE V NEXT HIKE Operating Modes You can select any mode other than REG from the list in the mode selection window Your POS terminal supports the following eight operating modes REG mode This mode allows you to enter various sales information The mode selection window does not list this mode To select this mode from the mode selection window press the key OPX Z mode This mode allows cashiers servers to take X or Z reports on their sales It can also be
248. try You can also select a service key by pressing the corresponding key when it has been placed directly on the keyboard instead of selecting the key from the menu 175 E Final key Procedure FINAL HEADER ON BILL FOOTER ON BILL BILL PRINT non compuLsory 7 9 0 OUTPUT KP No 1 QUTPUT KP No 2 OUTPUT KP No 3 CHIT RECEIPT DATA ENT JOB PREV PGH2 MIKE The screen continues Program each item as follows e HEADER ON BILL Use the selective entry method YES Enables header printing on the bill NO Disables header printing on the bill e FOOTER ON BILL Use the selective entry method YES Enables footer printing on the bill NO Disables footer printing on the bill e BILL PRINT Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Compulsory bill printing NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory bill printing e OUTPUT KP No 1 thru 3 Use the number entry method ID number of the remote printer 1 2 or 3 1 digit 1 to 9 If the number 0 is entered data will be printed on the remote printer e CHIT RECEIPT Use the selective entry method YES Prints on the chit receipt in the remote printer format NO Prints nothing on the chit receipt e DATA ENT JOB Use the numeric entry method Key data entry job no Capture job no O thru 99 When 0 is programmed data capture entry is inhibited e EFT ACCT PROG Use the selective entry method You can select EFT ACCT compulsory or not
249. u can program a maximum of eight characters for each department group 1 9 Procedure Select the desired department group number from the depart ment group list Program the item as follows e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for the department group Up to 12 characters can be entered DEPT GROUP1 A PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE 0001 10 37AM E PLU group text You can program a maximum of eight characters for each PLU group 1 99 Procedure Select the desired PLU group number from the PLU group list e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for the PLU group Up to 12 characters can be entered PLU GROUPO1 UTE Program the item as follows PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y PGH2 MIKE 0001 10 38AM 185 E Server group text You can program a maximum of eight characters for each server group 1 9 Procedure Select the desired server group no from the server groups list SERVER GROUP1 PUP GROUP1 Program the item as follows e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for the server group Up to 12 characters can be entered PREV PGH2 MIKE 0001 10 39AM E Message text You can program a message consisting of a maximum of 16 characters for each remote printer Select the desired message no Program each item as follows from the message list 9 e TEXT Use the character entry meth
250. used to specify the number of hours for which employees work OFF mode This mode locks all the operational functions of the POS terminal When you select this mode the window will disappear Pressing any key turns the POS terminal ON X1 Z1 mode This mode is used to take various daily total reports X1 Z1 reports X2 Z2 mode This mode is used to take various weekly or monthly reports X2 Z2 reports PGM1 mode This mode allows you to program those items which need to be frequently changed such as unit prices of departments or PLUs and percentages PGM2 mode This mode allows you to program those items which can be programmed in the PGM1 and need not be frequently changed such as date time and functions SD Card mode This mode allows you to save the data of your POS terminal to an SD card or load the data saved in the SD card on the terminal 921 Mode Selection Procedure REVUES Al 1 OPXZ MODE 2 OFF MODE 3 X1 21 MODE 4 X2 22 MODE 5 PGN1 MODE 6 PGN2 MODE 7 SD CARD MODE PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y MODE MIKE 1 OPXZ MODE 2 OFF MODE 3 X1 Z1 MODE 4 X2 22 MODE EXT 6 PGM2 MODE 7 SD CARD MODE PREV NEXT LIST P DOWN Y MODE MIKE PGH1 MODE 2 SETTING 3 PLU UPDATE PREV PGMI MIKE E Selecting a mode 1 Use one of the following ways e Move the cursor to the desired option using the ES or E key e Enter the desired option number using a numeric key e Touch the desired option e Mov
251. ut 9 MANUAL TAX Manual tax 10 TAX DELETE Tax delete 11 NO SALE No sale 12 VOID Void 13 REFUND Refund The following illustration shows the functional programming options 4 FUNCTION GROUP DISC GAS DISCOUNT GRATUITY TIP 00 YJoO0d2a0nNn MANUAL TAX TAX DELETE NO SALE VOID REFUND See See See See See See See See See See See See See Discount key on page 145 Percent key on page 146 Group discount Key on page 147 Gas discount on page 148 Gratuity on page 149 Tip on page 149 RA on page 150 PO on page 151 Manual tax on page 151 Tax delete on page 152 No sale on page 152 Void on page 153 Refund on page 153 i E Discount key thru Program each item as follows Select the desired discount key e AMOUNT Use the numeric entry method from the discount keys list Discount amount max 6 digits O to 999999 e TEXT Use the character entry method Description for the discount key Up to 12 characters can be entered e SIGN Use the selective entry method ST ER The or sign assigns the premium or discount function to each AMOUNT discount key ps gt 8 Minus amount discount TAXABLEL 56 Plus amount premium TAXABLE2 TAXABLES aie e TAXABLE1 thru 5 Use the selective entry method TAXABLES i iil am 00 ENTA YES Taxable
252. ve entry method NO Prints nothing on the chit receipt YES Prints the PLU sales information on the chit receipt in the remote printer format e CVM CTRL CHAR Use the numeric entry method CVM Color Video Monitor control character 0 thru 255 129 E PLU UPC continued e REPEAT ROUND Use the selective entry method NO Inhibits repeat round registration YES Allows repeat round registration e DOUGHNUT EXEMPT Use the selective entry method YES Enables the doughnut tax exemption Canadian tax system NO Disables the doughnut tax exemption e DATA ENT JOB Use the numeric entry method Key data entry job number Capture job number 0 thru 99 When 0 is programmed data entry is inhibited e NON ACCESS Use the selective entry method NON DEL Not delete non accessed UPCs by Z1 report DEL BYZ Delete non accessed UPCs by Z1 report For PLU it is fixed to NON DEL E Dynamic UPC For the UPC codes available to this POS terminal and type UPC files please refer to the Chapter 14 After you select 3 DYNAMIC UPC on the ARTICLE menu enter an UPC code or select a pertinent code The same items except MIN STOCK as the PLU UPC described in the previous section will appear Please refer to the PLU UPC section for entering values or selecting options The data will be saved in the Dynamic UPC file E PLU range You can program the PLUs by a range as follows Procedure PLU RANGE ae e START
253. void key Subtotal void key Group discount 1 thru 3 keys Cover count entry key New check key Bill separation key Bill totalize Bill transfer key CHECK ADD Food stamp tender by EBT key Guest check copy key Cash benefit key Guest check balance key Cash menu key Function menu 2 thru 30 key Manual tax key Remote printer send key Gratuity exempt key Tare entry key Balance key JI m U a 3 IND PAYMEN 4 O E 09 4 BIRTH gt WO m D llo g loa 55 a a 1129 5z2 25 mu JJ JJ SE Cy O EE Z i U mS ZO E lt mu Se z 20 z Oo gt O I O PSIZ CAP 1 CA CHK1 MGR HOLDIRECALL 14 ri MSG j 5 gt KO JU O O y a Repeat entry key Individual payment key Customer code entry key Birthday entry key Table no seat no entry key Void menu key Refund sale key Receipt ON OFF key Waste mode key Condiment next key Edit tip key Repeat round key Table recall key Message 1 thru 5 keys Message menu key PLU menu 1 thru 50 keys Macro 1 thru 4 keys Upsize key Data capture 1 thru 10 key Check cashing 1 thru 9 keys Manager number keys Hold Recall keys E Default key texts on the display The key and through keys can be set as function keys on the keyboard area of the display Note that the labels on the key tops in this manual may differ from the displayed default key t
254. y method LIMITED Only available to the manager PUBLIC Available to the manager and servers cashiers e RETURN TO LEVEL1 lt Return to level 1 gt Use the selective entry method When the PLU level shift system is set to AUTO the PLU level can be returned to level 1 by one of the following methods RECEIPT Returns the PLU level to level 1 by one receipt BY ITEM Returns the PLU level to level 1 by one item e RETURN TO PRICE1 lt Return to price 1 gt Use the selective entry method When the PLU price level shift method is set to AUTO the price level can be returned to price 1 by one of the following methods RECEIPT Returns the price level to price 1 by one receipt BY ITEM Returns the price level to price 1 by one item 196 E Function selection 2 Your POS terminal enables you to select various functional settings Program each item as follows Procedure SEAT Use the selective entry method COMPULSORY Compulsory seat number entry GLU operations bao INHIBIT Inhibited seat number entry GLU operations COVER CT NON COMPULSORY AE SERVER DRANER IAMIBIT R e COVER CT Use the selective entry method a arsaa COMPULSORY Compulsory cover count entry GLU operations CONDIMENT CANCEL PUBLIC NON COMPULSORY Non compulsory cover count entry GLU ISBN PRICE COMPULSORY PREV operations PG 2 MIKE TIP ENTRY Use the selective entry method FIX RATE Tip entry using a programmed r
255. y received the data Procedure SETTING 3 i 19 MACRO KEY 20 FUNCTION KEY 21 CAPTURE KEY 22 CAPTURE JOB 23 TAX Program the item as follows e SPEED Use the selective entry method Select one of the following options data transmission speeds PROGRAMMED Receives data at a programmed speed 24 TRAINING 25 BACKUP SEND 38400bps Receives data at 38400 bps 19200bps Receives data at 19200 bps PGM2 9600bps Receives data at 9600 bps 4800bps Receives data at 4800 bps 2400bps Receives data at 2400 bps BACKUP RECEIVE il SPEED PROGRAMMED RENE ERIS BEIN EARN Da CAUTION The receiving unit must have equal or larger memories than the terminal sending the program 241 PLU Updating in the PGM1 Mode The PLU UPDATE option is primary used a supervisor or manager to change the PLU s unit price or name daily Procedure To program a unit price or name for the PLU proceed as follows PGH1 MODE 1 READING 2 SETTING 3 PLU UPDATE 1 In the PGM1 window press the UPDATE key or select the option 3 PLU UPDATE e The PLU list will appear PGH1 2 Select the desired PLU code from the list PL00001 PL00002 PL00003 PL00004 NEXT PGM1 00001 PRICE 1 maa NANE1 PL00001 3 Program a unit price or name for the corresponding price level KP TEXTI PL00001 e PRICE1 thru 6 Use the numeric entry method Unit price of each price level max 6 digit
256. y the number of times the key is pressed When the cover count is not entered and the key is not pressed the cover count is counted as 1 3 Seat entry is only for the table system When seat entry is compulsory you must enter a seat To enter the first person enter the seat max 2 digits and press the key To enter the second or subsequent person enter the number and press the key The number of times of seat entry must not exceed the entered cover count 4 These are of optional functions Temporary finalization You can temporarily finalize a guest check by pressing the or mu key It is advisable to use the 59 key when printing is not desired and to use the key when printing of the current balance including tax is desired Even after this temporary finalization operation the guest check is still open This means you can still make additional orders for the guest check GLU recall Each server can recall his or her GLUs for reorder entry or settlement GLU RECALL by pressing the key On the display the list of GLUs that are still a 2 21 20 E open is displayed Select the desired GLU and press the key or enter the desired GLU and press the key while the recall window is shown on the display The recall window will be displayed automatically if so programmed TAX 1 20 SBTL 20 00 P DOWN Y JACK P1L1 An example of GLU recall window Reorder entries For making additional

Sharp UP-820N User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents